JP6748620B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention comprises a display means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game. Regarding the machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game is executed based on a winning of a starting winning opening arranged in a game area, and when the result of the game is a specific result mode, a special game state in which a game value is given to a player Is generally generated.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of executing various effects by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided (for example, see Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

JP, 2013-183871, A JP 2001-149576 A

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the variable display game is executed on the display screen in a state where the hold display, the effect image, etc. overlap with the identification information, so that the effect display by the hold display, the effect image, etc. is conspicuous. It was difficult to attract the attention of the players, and there was room for improving the fun of the game.

Then, this invention aims at improving the interest of a game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a display means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed in a plurality of columns based on establishment of a start condition, and an effect related to the variable display game is executed. In the gaming machine provided with possible effect control means, the effect control means can change the predetermined identification information in the variable display to the stopped state, and before the temporary stop state different from the stopped state. Oite a predetermined period, are displayed on the same level and the predetermined identification information in the variable display, the identification information displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information, by displaying high transparency The predetermined identification information is in a state that is less visible or invisible than the predetermined identification information, and during the predetermined period, the predetermined identification information is entirely in the display unit at a timing when the predetermined identification information is in the temporary stop state. It is characterized in that it is shorter than the period from the time it is displayed in the display area until it moves to the temporary stop position .

According to the above embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a figure which shows the jackpot probability according to a setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in the figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of external information edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 reservation information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 reservation information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit system command processing. It is a figure explaining the example of setting of a variation pattern (variation mode). It is a figure explaining the other example of a setting of a change pattern (change mode). It is a timing chart which shows an example of a timing when a precursor effect is executed. It is a figure showing an example (first half) of an operation of a movable accessory and display on a display device in the aura effect. It is a figure showing an example (second half) of operation of a movable accessory and display on a display device in a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a display of the display device in a sign production. It is a figure which shows the other example of operation|movement of the movable accessory in a sign production. It is a figure explaining the sign production performed with a pseudo continuous change mode (what is called pseudo continuous production). It is a figure which shows a mode that a character image acts on specific reservation display. It is a figure which shows an example of an action availability lottery table and a pending change change effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd type aura effect (modification of aura effect). It is a figure which shows the other example of the 2nd type aura effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of a hold change frequency lottery, a character lottery, and an action frequency lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of holding change production. It is a figure which shows the other example of holding change production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of holding change production. It is a figure explaining the situation where the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command when the hold occurs. It is a figure explaining the situation where the prefetching effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command at the time of hold occurrence. It is a figure explaining the other situation where the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command when the hold occurs. It is a figure explaining the situation where the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of the holding shift. It is a figure explaining the situation where prefetch effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the number-of-holds command at the time of holding shift. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a timing chart which shows the change of the display mode of a hold display, a decoration special design, and a decoration reduction design with time passage. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the number of holdings has not reached the upper limit in the normal game state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the number of holdings has reached the upper limit in the normal game state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the reach state generate|occur|produces in a normal game state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a pseudo continuous production occurs. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is another example of the screen transition of the whole game at the time of a pseudo continuous production|generation. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is another another example of the screen transition of the whole game when a pseudo continuous production occurs. In 2nd Embodiment, it is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game at the time of production display. In the modification of 2nd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in case a decoration 1st design is displayed by a plurality of lines in time series. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of single command system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production setting processing during a stop concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device of the third embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the big hit in the time series. It is a timing chart explaining the change of the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device of the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 16 is a screen transition diagram showing, in a time series, the display screen of the display device in which the fanfare background and the characters “big hit” are displayed in different display modes according to the type of big hit in the modification of the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an effect control device of a 4th embodiment, a board connected to this, etc. In 4th Embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the connection form of the some voltage generation circuit in the voltage generation part which comprises an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the connection form of the some voltage generation circuit in the voltage generation part which comprises an effect control device. It is a block diagram showing the connection form of the voltage generation circuit and its peripheral elements concerning a 4th embodiment. It is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. 75 is a time chart of the output voltage of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit according to the connection form of FIG. 74 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. FIG. 77 is a time chart of the output voltage of the core voltage generation circuit, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit according to the connection form of FIG. 75 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. In a 4th embodiment, it is a figure showing the outline of a production control device and a LVDS board.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The lighting members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). Projection production unit 1
3 is a production device for performing a light emission production or the like according to the progress state of the game. Projection production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific game state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), big hit state (
It is a special game state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided and specified. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. And a lower plate 23 are provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
With 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the. The gaming machine 10,
The game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball shooting device to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
There is provided an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 has a starting winning opening unit 1 including a first starting winning opening 36 and a third starting winning opening 42.
Since it is arranged above 01, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is easy to win in the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c (may be a movable accessory) and the side effect unit 40d (may be a movable accessory) constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4). doing.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening unit 101 is provided. In the lower part of the starting winning opening unit 101, a first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1) that gives a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure 1 variable display game when a game ball is won.
) And a third starting winning opening 42 (third starting winning area, starting opening 3) for giving a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game when a game ball wins.

The starting winning opening unit 101, the game ball entered from the common entrance 103, the winning switching mechanism 105
The first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 can be alternately distributed to win the prize. A known mechanism (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 201-201) is used as the prize switching mechanism 105.
5-36026 and JP-A-2015-77230) can be used. The prize switching mechanism 105 constitutes a region changing means for changing a prize region.

The winning prize switching mechanism 105 distributes the game balls entered from the common entrance 103 of the starting winning opening unit 101 to the left side (the first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (the third starting winning opening 42 side), and the starting winning opening unit Flow down the inside of 101. In the common entrance 103 of the starting winning opening unit 101, the game ball is more likely to flow into the common area 103 on the left side of the game area 32 when the ball is left-handed than when it is right-handed.

The prize switching mechanism 105 has a rotating member that rotates around a rotation shaft with respect to the main body of the winning prize opening unit 101, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotating member has three extending portions extending in three directions from the rotation axis. By the three extending portions, an L-shaped accommodating portion for accommodating a game ball to be flown down to the first starting winning opening 36 and an L-shaped accommodating portion for accommodating a game ball to be flowed down at the third starting winning opening 42. It is formed.

The winning prize switching mechanism 105 alternately rotates the rotating member to the left side and the right side, and alternately switches the starting winning opening through which the gaming ball wins to the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42. As long as there is no error, the game ball that has entered the common entrance 103 of the starting winning opening unit 101 alternates between the left side (the first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (the third starting winning opening 42 side) by the prize switching mechanism 105. Will be distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 alternately (winning).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, below the universal figure starting gate 34,
An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) for giving the starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning of the game ball is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. Game ball is the first start winning hole 3
6, when the second start winning port (normal variation winning device 37) or the third starting winning port 42 is won, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called electric Chu type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the ordinary image variable display game is a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball is opened and the open state (the easy winning state which is advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37 is changed.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure changing display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure changing display game to be higher than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the easy prize winning state than the easy prize winning state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Even in the probability changing state (excluding the latent probability changing state) as the specific game state, a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs redundantly.

In the game area 32 at the lower left of the normal variation winning device 37, the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).
(See), there is provided a special variation winning device 39 having an attacker type opening/closing door 39c that opens the big winning opening by retracting from the front side. The special variation winning device 39 converts a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and a big prize is awarded. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

In addition to the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39, the variable winning device unit 107 is provided with a general winning opening 35 in the lower right gaming area 32.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, third starting winning opening 42, normal variable winning device 37,
And, when the game ball wins the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3).
(Refer to), the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21.
Further, in the game area 32 below the starting winning opening unit 101, an out opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 (LED lamps) that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display section) and a second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for a variable display game including a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. (Special figure 2 display unit), variation display unit 53 for public figure variation display game (Public figure display unit), and memory display unit for notifying the number of starting (holding) memories of each variation display game (Special figure 1 suspension) The display 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the universal figure hold indicator 56) are provided.

In addition, the collective display device 50, a first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator) for notifying that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator) that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, that the probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. The third game state display unit 59 (third game state indicator, high probability notification LED, probability state display unit) for displaying
A round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variation winning device 39 is opened and closed) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be configured by a group of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked) and cyclically turned on (either one). One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs may be turned on/off (blinking) or cyclic lighting. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by variable display (blinking) in which LED lamps are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the public figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and a non-lighting display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored (held number). The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display portions 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle. Batch display device 50
While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the universal figure display 53 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp display part 1 of the lamp display device 80, Two
The variation time of is measured by the performance control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decorative special figure 1 holding LED 1, decorative special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the decorative special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display portions 5 and 6 (decorative special figure 2 hold LED1, decorative special figure 2 hold LED2) indicate the decorative special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The flashing cycle of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the flashing cycle of the lamp display section 3-6 (decoration of special decoration) are the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 m
sec off) may be used, but the blinking cycle may be different so that the decorative special figure reservation and the fourth special symbol can be easily distinguished. Further, the on/off (display/non-display) time of the lamp display section 1-6 may be different.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the first start. The winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. To be done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball of the upper plate 2 via the payout device
It is discharged to 1.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

A random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored in the universal figure starting memory, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in the lighted state and a deviation when the light is in the off state. By blinking the LED, the ordinary figure information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state, and is in the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning of the normal variation winning device 37, and the winning of the third starting winning opening 42 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.
(See FIG. 3) and the start port 3 switch 42a (see FIG. 3). The game balls that have won the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), and the ordinary variable winning device 37 And, the game balls that have won the third starting winning opening 42 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored within a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment).

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning storages for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The memory number of the special figure 1 starting prize winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory, first starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 holding indicator 54 for informing the number of starting winning prizes of the collective display device 50, and the display device 41. Is also displayed on the display screen of. Special figure 2 start winning memory (Special figure 2 start memory, second
The stored number of (starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variation winning device 37 or the third starting winning opening 42 or the second starting memory.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), the identification information in the special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52 ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). Also,
On the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are displayed for the purpose of improving the interest. Further, in the decorative special map variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is varied by repeating (flashing) the lighting display and the extinction display, and the special symbol variation. Indicates that the display game is being executed. The variable display of the fourth special symbol, after a predetermined time from the start, in the case of off, "lights out", in the case of a big hit, "lights" and stops. The variable display of the fourth special symbol is displayed on the lamp display parts 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80, but the other display devices 4
1, may be displayed on the sub display device.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value).
In the special result variation display game, as a result of the display pattern, a specific result mode (special result mode)
Is derived, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is energized to convert the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens greatly until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed in the order in which a prize (that is, start memory) is generated (winning order winning), and the special figure 1 variable display game and/or When the starting memory of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated and the special figure variable display game is ready to be executed, the variable display game based on the oldest starting memory is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting opening 3 in the third starting winning opening 42. The switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact for detecting a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. Further, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like (
A micro switch having a mechanical contact can be used as the main frame opening detection switch.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 CP.
The U unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 for generating and outputting.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after being supplied to the built-in RAM) and during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 1
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 11 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. The variation pattern (variation mode) may include a pattern that causes reach.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it is in the special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect system (reach type, type) in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), Special 0 reach (SP0 reach), Special 1 reach (SP
1 Reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set. It should be noted that the expected value (expectation degree, reliability) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 0 reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach (full rotation reach). ..
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the reach and the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach, and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Based on a predetermined cycle (for example, 4
It is provided with a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of msec (millisecond) and an update timing of the random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game game result (big hit or miss), the special figure variation display game probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) as the current gaming state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a variation allocation information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in second start winning opening 37
, The start opening 3 switch 42a in the third start winning opening 42, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for receiving a signal of negative logic as described above and converting it to a signal of positive logic of 0V-5V is provided.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 42a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. It

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the gaming machine 10 has a setting changing device 43 (setting changing means) capable of changing the setting relating to the game condition, and the second input port 123 is connected to the setting changing device 43 so that the setting changing device 43 receives the setting. A signal is input. For example, the setting changing device 43 may be a setting changing device usually provided in a slot machine, and may be configured by a key switch, a button switch, a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), or the like. The setting change device 43 is provided inside the gaming machine 10, and is provided, for example, at a position where it cannot be operated (a position where access is not possible) unless the front frame 12 is opened. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting changing device 43. The setting change device 43 may be provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100 (on the main board).

With the setting change device 43, it is possible to change the settings relating to the game conditions such as the jackpot probability and the probability variation plunge rate. In this embodiment, the settings relating to the game conditions are setting 1 and setting 2.
, There are settings 3, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player (low setting), setting 2 is an intermediate setting (intermediate setting), setting 3 is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting) Is.

Further, the second input port 123, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the fraudulent radio wave signal output from the payout control device 200, the payout busy signal. Is entered. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input section 120, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, a front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 and the like, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. Signal, shoot ball out switch signal, which indicates the shortage of game balls before payout,
There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow and a touch switch signal based on the input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full).

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
Taken in 11. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST corresponds to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-fire testing device.

In addition, the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variation winning device 39 are output to the output unit 130. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c and a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and a segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 Second driver 1 for outputting line on/off drive signal
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
12V DC is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of FIG. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S3, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. Photo coupler 13
9, the game microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 including a ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decoration lamp, and drives the motor. Performs processing such as drive control of solenoids and control of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
Through the 31, the decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value, and the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the off-result mode on the general-picture display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 variable display game The random number for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b,
Special Figure 1 It is determined whether or not the variable display game is hit.

Further, the starting opening 2 switch 37a and the third starting winning opening 4 provided in the normal variation winning device 37.
The starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 3 switch 42a provided in 2. Based on the starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and R
By comparing with the determination value stored in the OM 111b, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, third starting winning port 42). It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved is defined as one round (R), and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times or 6 times). .. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the opening time of
It becomes a power support state). In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplicating time shortening state is performed to perform normal power support (electric power support).

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the second variation display time is shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the time saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until the program of the secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00, etc.) to form a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of (00 etc.).

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures the time using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
Operation 2 can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time elapses, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the waiting time elapses, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A1008).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

If the power failure monitoring signal is ON, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 for determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write memory (Read/Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting changing device 43 is on, that is, whether or not the setting changing device 43 is in a state where the setting can be changed (A1016). For example, when the key switch of the setting changing device 43 is turned on by inserting a key or the like, it can be determined that the setting changing device 43 is turned on.

The game control device 100, when the setting change device 43 is on (the result of A1016 is "
Y”), and a setting change process for changing the setting is executed (A1017). In the setting change processing, every time the button switch of the setting change device 43 is pressed by the operator, the setting of the gaming machine 10 is changed and selected as setting 1→setting 2→setting 3→setting 1... The configuration may be changed by rotating the key to a predetermined position instead of operating the button switch. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 3 are displayed on the 7-segment type display device of the setting changing device 43. When the key switch of the setting change device 43 is turned off due to the key being removed,
The setting (that is, the setting value) is confirmed and stored in the setting information storage area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting changing process ends. The 7-segment type display device of the setting changing device 43 may be changed directly in conjunction with the operation of the button switch via an electric circuit, or may be changed via the game microcomputer 111.

When the setting change device 43 is not turned on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1016 is "
N”), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 previously read (A1018). Here, it is determined whether or not the initialization for clearing the RAM area is executed.

When the initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1018 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. A determination is made (A1019). If it is normal (the result of A1019 is “Y”)
), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1020).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (validity determination means). Is executed (A1021), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off match (A1022). If the checksums match, (A
If the result of 1022 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 5B, and the process when the power is restored normally is executed.

When the processes of steps A1021 and A1022 are separately performed in the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in the RWM, only the area where the mismatch is detected in subsequent steps A1028-A1032. May be initialized (for the game information storage area) or set to the default setting (for the setting information storage area), or even if a mismatch is detected in one area, both Initialize area (for game information storage area)
Alternatively, the default setting (for the setting information storage area) may be performed. For example, when an abnormality (checksum mismatch) in the setting information storage area is detected, the subsequent step A103
In No. 1, assuming that incorrect setting information is saved in the setting information storage area, predetermined setting information (for example, setting 1) can be saved as an initial value in the setting information storage area as a default setting. The game information storage area is an area for storing game information about a game (variable display game) (for example, random numbers, customer waiting demo information, effect mode settings, etc.).

In addition, the game control device 100, when the setting change process is performed (the result of A1016 is "Y
)), if the initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1018 is “Y”), it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1019 is “N”).
, Or the result of A1020 is “N”, and the checksum is not normal (A102
If the result of 2 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1028 of FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the setting change device 43 and the initialization switch 112 form an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 RAMs based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
It constitutes an initializing means for initializing the data stored in. When changing the settings, the initialization after the setting change processing is performed before it is determined whether the initialization switch 112 is turned on. Therefore, the initialization by the setting change and the switch 112 are turned on. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the initialization due to the above is not repeated.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10).
23). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The setting information storage area is excluded from the area to be initialized. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether the game state is the high probability state (A1024).
..

Here, when the gaming state is not the high-probability state (result of A1024 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1025 and step A1026, and shifts to the process of step A1027. If the game state is a high probability state (A1
024 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1025),
For example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided on the collective display device 50 is turned on (lighted).
The data is saved in the segment area (A1026). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and in step A1033. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1028 after executing steps A1018, A1019, A1020, and A1022, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1028). Furthermore, all R except the setting information storage area
The AM area (including the busy signal status area) is cleared to 0 (A1029), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1030). The process of step A1029 is
An initialization unit that initializes (clears) an area other than the setting information storage area in the storage unit (RAM) is configured.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized here is, for example, a partial area of the game information storage area (area related to information of customer waiting demo, area related to effect mode setting, etc.). Although the setting information storage area is basically not the area to be initialized, if the checksum is exceptionally abnormal (result of A1022 is “N”), incorrect setting information is saved in the setting information storage area. Since there is a possibility that it has been set, prescribed setting information (for example, setting 1 which is the default setting) may be saved in the setting information storage area as an initial value. As mentioned above, RW
The checksum may be calculated separately for the setting information storage area and the game information storage area in M,
If the checksum of either the setting information storage area or the game information storage area is not normal,
The value or information may be saved only in the abnormal area, or the value or information may be saved in both areas. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1032), and executes the process of step A1033.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1027 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of 032 includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and a decorative special figure 2 reserved number indicating the reserved numbers of special figures 1 and 2. A command and a probability information command indicating a state of probability are included. Further, in the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization, there is a setting information command indicating the setting information (setting value, setting information) of the gaming machine 10 and the power restoration (turn-on). The recovery screen command shown is included. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, a customer waiting demo command is included when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, and a time saving number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included. Since the initialization of the RAM is performed when the power is restored (turned on), the command for the initialization of the RAM is a RAM indicating that the RAM has been initialized (cleared) in addition to the command for the restoration of the power failure. It also includes initialization commands. When the power is restored (turned on), the game control device 100 only needs to send the setting information command to the effect control device 300 only once, and the effect control device 300 refers to the setting information stored by itself to control the effect. To do.

The game control device 100 is a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) The circuit is activated (A1033). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 11 based on the divided signal.
1a is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1033, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1034). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC in the random number generation circuit
The code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit is set in the update permission register (C).
It is performed by the PU 111a. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit pattern random number 2), a random number that determines the hit of a general figure (random number per hit)
, R as the initial value (start value) of the random number that determines the winning symbol of the universal symbol (the winning symbol random number, etc.)
The data is saved in a predetermined area of the WM (A1035) and the interrupt is permitted (A1036). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is set to the initial value of various initial value random numbers (
By setting the start value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken,
It is possible to make it difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1037). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of PU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt process that is the processing unit of the program ( CTC (CTC) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit design random number and the hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step A1037, the game control device 100 determines the power supply device 40.
The number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read through the port and the data bus and checked is set (A1038), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
39). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1039 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number updating process of 1037. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By allowing the interrupt (A1036) before the initial value random number updating process (A1037), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1037 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1039 is “Y”), the game control device 10
In 0, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1038 (A1040). If the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1040 is “N”), the process returns to step A1039 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1041), and off data is output to all output ports (A104).
2).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1043) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1044). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1045), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1046).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1047), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

The game control device 100 first updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (
A1201). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the ordinary figure. It is a random number that becomes the initial value.

As described above, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input process of reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set by various processes, solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 39b)
An output process for performing drive control of the actuators such as is executed (A1304). If the firing prohibition signal is output in step A1005 of the main process,
By performing this output process, the firing permission signal is output, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1305), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1306), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 39a is monitored to see if there is a normal signal input, and an error is detected. A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1308).

Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game is executed (A1309).
), and then executes the universal figure game processing for performing processing relating to the universal figure variation display game (A131).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED edit process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1311).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1313).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning to the register bank 0.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, is the prize to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

The game control device 100, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (A170
The result of 1 is "N"), and the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas is completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed, the game control device 100 (the result of A1703 is "
Y”), and the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701 and steps A1701 to A1703 are repeated.

Further, when there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1701 is “Y”).
), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1704), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area as a new remaining number of prize balls (A1707). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before the process of step A1707, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). When it is not 0 or more (A1709)
Result of “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, when it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A17).
10), save the subtraction result in the remaining number of prize balls area (A1711), and further, step A170.
Return to the process of 8.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal comes to be output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, so It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A171).
2) It is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy status flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (
Busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The pay-out busy signal status (flag) is based on the state of the pay-out busy signal and the pay-out control device 200.
Is information that sets whether or not payout control can be started immediately, an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, an indefinite state in which the state is indeterminate Is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy, the game control device 100 (A1
When the result of 714 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the busy state is not set, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, the payout control device 2
If 00 does not start the payout control immediately and does not send the payout command, by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the sending of the payout command, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing and reduce the control load. I try to reduce it.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or impossible. To resolve. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

If the payout busy signal status is not busy, the game control device 100 (A1
The result of 714 is "N"), and it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, the number of counts which is not “0” is checked in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

Then, when there is no count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is "N
)), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (A1716), and it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas is completed (A17).
17). When all the checks are completed (result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmitting process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (A171
7 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17
The processes up to 17 are repeated.

Further, if there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is “Y”).
), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1718), and the payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 outputs a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control, indicating that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs due to some cause, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present embodiment, the payout control device 200
It is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing a function for backing up.

In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control in a centralized manner, the winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the third starting winning opening 42, the general winning opening 35) provided in the gaming area 32,
Game control means for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the special variation winning device 39) (
The game control device 100), and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is a payout control means. The payout control means outputs a prize ball command to the payout control means based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control can be started, and a power failure occurs In the case of returning, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the payout control means performs the payout control. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the ball can be started for a predetermined period.

In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 39), The game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing the payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. When the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The state signal determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control, prior to the determination as to whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. It will be.

In addition, the game control is carried out comprehensively, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening 37, the third starting winning opening 42, the general winning opening 35, and the special variation winning device 39), and the game. Based on the prize ball command transmitted from the control means, the payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls, and the game control means is the payout control means output from the payout control means. Payout command transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means when the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started indicates that the payout control can be started. And an external information output means (game control) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. Apparatus 100), and the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control. This is what I did.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period, and a prize ball command is issued. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning prize). The award ball command is generated in units of one award to the mouth 42, the general award port 35, and the special variation award device 39), and the one award ball is generated when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. That is, the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted is updated by updating the game balls at the time of winning in a predetermined prize area and by transmitting the award ball command to the payout control means. The memorizable external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the prize winning of the game balls in a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter, which is configured to output to the outside, can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, and is updated when the game ball is prized in the predetermined prize area. By performing the update in association with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the cumulative process.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the two winning opening switches 39a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it is monitored whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, and the fraud & prize monitoring processing for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2002).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2003).
Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2005). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2006). Next, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches capable of always winning is prepared (A2007). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switch capable of always winning is the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a. The winning opening switch that does not require unauthorized monitoring is the starting opening 1
The switch 36a and the like.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2008). Subsequently, a start opening error monitoring process for monitoring a winning error at the start winning opening is executed (A2009). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is the target of the current monitoring is updated (A2010). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2012)
..

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shooting ball running out error) based on the shoot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set up. The value of the status scan counter is 2
If the value is 3, the monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state (payout abnormal error) based on the payout abnormal status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2014).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the illegal radio wave signal (frame illegal radio wave) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2015
Result of "N"), the winning a prize switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (A2
The result of 015 is “Y”), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2016), and the gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2017) is executed.
..

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Note that the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2018). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2016 to A2018 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processing from A2016 to A2018 is performed every 6 ms.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42
The input of a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a (A26).
01). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, and the third starting winning opening 42, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted. , A game result pre-judgment for pre-judging the game result based on the prize is performed before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2615.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The special figure normal processing that monitors the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game and sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the information necessary for performing the processing during special figure fluctuation It is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
A special figure changing process is executed to set a stop display time of the special figure and information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process (A2609). For the details of the special figure changing process, see FIG.
It will be described later in 2.

If the game process number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, in order to set the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare/interval processing The special figure displaying process for setting the information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). Details of the special figure displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
The fanfare/interval processing is performed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A2611). Details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set an interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A2612). The details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

If the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing etc. It is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, if the round is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100,
Special figure Performs the jackpot end process that sets the information required to execute the normal process (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state ends or the Poden support state after the jackpot state ends ( Necessary information such as (time saving state) is set, and the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (probability state (high probability/low probability) after the big hit state ends and number of continuous games (time shortening change count, power support count) in the normal power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends. ) Information is included.

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2615), and thereafter, the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and wins the first starting winning opening 36. It is determined whether there is any (A2703). If there is no winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "N"), the processing from step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first start winning hole 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A
When the result of 2704 is “N”), the processes of step A2707 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of this embodiment, the first starting winning opening 36 must be left-handed to win.
The normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the first start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (ie, normal power support) When left-handed during the state), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like. ..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (
A2708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the processing of step A2716 and thereafter is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric power illegality is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal wins to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent prize number. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). , The special drawing starting port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and step A2
The processing after 716 is executed. In addition, in A2713, a fraudulent accident is occurring (A271).
Even when it is determined that the result of No. 3 is “Y”), the processes of step A2716 and subsequent steps are executed. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

The game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2716), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2717), and then the third starting winning opening 4
It is determined whether or not there is a winning in 2 (starting opening 3) (A2718). When there is no winning in the third starting winning opening 42 (result of A2718 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the third start winning port 42 (result of A2718 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2719).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A
When the result of 2719 is “N”), the processes of step A2722 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2719 is “Y”), right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2720), and production command setting processing is executed ( A2721).

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed .. In the case of the present embodiment, the third starting winning opening 42 must be left-handed to win.
The normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize at the third start winning port 42 during the normal power support state (ie, normal power support) When left-handed during the state), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like. ..

Next, the game control device 100, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2722), executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A
2723), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the starting port switch monitoring process.
, A2717) will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the start-winning-win information indicating that there is no win in the start winning-a prize hole (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2
802), if there is no input to the target switch (result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710. In the hard random number acquisition process of step A2717,
The starting port 3 switch 42a.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "Y
)), the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register) is read, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

The game control device 100, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
The result of 4 is "Y"), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the target hard random number latch register to prepare (A2805), and the start mouth winning information indicating that there is a win to the start winning mouth is set. (A2806). The prepared jackpot random numbers are used in the common processing of the special figure starting port switch.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process in the starting port switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715, A2723) will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 42a are input.

The game control device 100 first manages information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times the starting port signal is output to the device is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (A
The result of 2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 42a, the update target special figure reservation number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target startup port switch. Is determined to be less than the upper limit value (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. (A2906).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command or decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number as a production command. (A2907), the effect command setting process is executed (A290
8). Then, the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2909). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2910), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 into the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2911). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2912), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2913).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2914). Next, in RWM, the address of the variable order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number is calculated (A2915).
), save the target variable order flag in the calculated variable order flag storage area (A2916).
). As a result, the address of the storage area corresponding to any of the suspensions (for example, suspensions 1 to 8) is calculated, and the variation order flag indicating the variation (variation display game) of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved. Then, the special figure reservation information determination processing is executed (A2917), and the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the first winning area 36, the third winning hole 42, and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37. As a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game, the starting memory means stores a predetermined number up to the upper limit. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), with a predetermined number as an upper limit.
It is stored as a start memory, and the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 4
Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to 2 are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2917) in the common start opening switch process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a prefetch (preliminary determination) process of determining the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

The game control device 100 first prepares a low-probability determination flag indicating that the determination is made with a low probability (A3001), and determines whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (low-probability determination value). A pre-reading big hit determination process for determining whether or not is performed (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the prefetch big hit determination processing is a big hit (A3003). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (A3004), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 is set. Obtain the symbol information (A3005), step A
The processing moves to 3007. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a big hit (the result of A3003 is "
N"), the stopped stop symbol information is set (A3006), and the process proceeds to step A3007.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area in the RWM (
A3007). Then, the pre-read stop design command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop design information is prepared as a performance command (A3008), and performance command setting processing is executed (A3009). The read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) indicates stop symbol information determined by a low probability determination value.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag indicating that the determination is a high-probability (A3010), and determines whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (high-probability determination value). A pre-reading big hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a big hit is executed (A3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit (A3012). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3012 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (A3013), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 is set. Obtaining the symbol information (A3014), step A
The processing moves to 3016. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3012 is "
N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3015), and the process proceeds to step A3016.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state, special figure high probability) (A3016). When it is in the high probability state (result of A3016 is “Y”), the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3018. When not in a high probability state (the result of A3016 is “N”)
), the process of step A3017 is not performed, and the process directly proceeds to step A3018.

Thus, in the high probability state, the stop symbol information determined by the high probability determination value is overwritten in the symbol information area and finally saved. On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (in the case of low probability state), the stop symbol information (A3007) determined by the low probability determination value is finally saved in the symbol information area. The stop symbol information finally saved in the symbol information area is used in the look-ahead of the variation pattern (A3020, A3021).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3018), and executes the production command setting process (A3019). The prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) indicates stop symbol information and the like determined by the high probability determination value. Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, is executed (A3020), and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Is executed (A302
1). The special figure information setting process in step A3020 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3021 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the variation start process in the special figure normal process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number as an effect command (A3022) and executes an effect command setting process (A3).
023), and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target and the pre-reading variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are It is prepared and transmitted to the performance control device 300.
As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. Notifying the device 300, and in particular, changing the hold display 633 displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. Is possible.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the starting winning when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

Furthermore, by the above processing, both the pre-reading judgment result which is the big hit judgment with the low probability judgment value and the pre-reading judgment result which is the big hit judgment with the high probability judgment value are respectively the pre-read stop design command (low probability) and the pre-read stop design command. (High probability) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
As a result, even if the probability state of the big hit changes after the pre-reading stop symbol command is transmitted, the effect control device 300 can execute the pre-reading notice (preceding change notice, etc.) corresponding to the probability states before and after the change.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number are both 0 (A3301). When both the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number are 0 (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3310. When at least one of the number of special maps 1 and the number of special maps 2 is not 0 (result of A3301 is “N”), the fluctuation order corresponding to the first held hold (hold 1) (oldest hold) The variable order flag is loaded from the flag storage area (for a total of 1 reserves) (A3302).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the change order flag indicates a change in the special figure 1 (special figure 1 change display game) (A3303). When the variation order flag indicates the variation of Toku-zu 1 (result of A3303 is "Y"), the Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the number of reserved Toku-zu 1
The hold number command is prepared as an effect command (A3304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3305). This decorative special figure reservation number command includes information about a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 1 reservation number (the special figure 1 reservation number after execution of the special figure 1 variable display game). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3306), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In addition, when the variation order flag does not indicate the variation of Toku-zu 1 (the result of A3303 is "N
)), that is, if it indicates a change in special figure 2, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3307), and an effect command. A setting process is executed (A3308). This decorative special figure reservation number command includes information regarding a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 2 reservation number (the special figure 1 reservation number after execution of the special figure 2 variable display game). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3309), and the special figure normal process is ended.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are both 0 (A3301
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (A3310). If the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3310 is “Y”), the process moves to step A3315. If the customer waiting demo has not started (result of A3310 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311), and the customer waiting demo command is prepared as a production command (A3312). Execute command setting processing (A3213)
). Upon receiving the customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 executes the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the customer waiting demonstration elapsed timer area (A33).
14) If the customer waiting demo elapsed timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A3315).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “0” related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (
(A3316), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3317). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3318), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area in the RWM (A3319), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, the variable order flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for a total of 1 hold numbers) corresponding to the hold (hold 1) that is consumed first, and the variable display game of the type indicated by the change order flag is loaded. (Special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2 variable display game) is started. That is, the variable display game is executed in the order in which the winning (starting memory) occurs,
Holds will be played in the order of winning, from oldest to oldest.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (A3306) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information is executed for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing, the stop symbol number at the time of falling off or at the time of big hit, and the falling stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Further, the number-of-rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stopped symbol number and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number are acquired and saved.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3309) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first executes the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).
..

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3514), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A36).
01). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. It saves (A3606) and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3605 is “N”), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 18 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (A
The result of 3705 is “N”), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3604, A3704) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807), and the big hit judgment process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 802 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is the high probability state (probability change state) (A3803). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”).
), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3806 is "N"), and a big hit is set as a determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Big hit probability]
FIG. 21 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability and the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above for each setting.

As shown in FIG. 21, the big hit probability at the time of low probability and the big hit probability at the time of high probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting), and the big hit easily occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The big hit probability can be changed according to the setting information by changing the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number corresponding to the setting information (setting value). In another example, only one of the big hit probability at the time of low probability and the big hit probability at the time of high probability may be configured to be higher as the set value becomes larger.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

Game control device 100, as a production command, a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) Prepare (A4701) and execute effect command setting process (
A4702). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 800 msec when the stop symbol pattern is the outlier pattern pattern, and the display time is set to 2000 msec when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit pattern. When transmitting the information on the display time to the effect control device 300, a display time command corresponding to the display time may be prepared, and the effect command setting process may be executed for the display time command. The display time command in this case is a kind of symbol stop command (B1319 in FIG. 35 described later). Also, A
The order of the processes of 4702 and A4703 may be exchanged, and the symbol stop command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 while including the information on the display time.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during special figure display (A4
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 uses a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, displays a stop flag related to a fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 change control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A4711). , The special figure changing process transition setting process ends.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure displaying process.

The game control device 100 first, the big hit flag 1 which is set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, and the big hit flag 2 which is set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing And, (A4801), RWM jackpot flag 1
The area and the jackpot flag 2 area are cleared (A4802).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4803), and when it is a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game. The test signal (for example, the special device 2 big hit) on the start (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 per signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM. It saves (A4811) and sets the round number upper limit value table (A4812).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of checking the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (
The result of A4803 is "N"), and it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot or not (
A4804), if it is a big hit (the result of A4804 is "Y"), a test signal (for example, a condition device in-operation signal is turned on, a character object) regarding the start of the big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 big hit). The continuous actuating device operating signal is turned on, the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4805), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A4812).

If the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit, the game control device 100 (the result of A4804 is "N
)), a high-probability-variation-number update process is performed to manage the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state (A4806). Then, as the processing number, “0
Is set (A4807), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A480).
8), clear the variable symbol determination flag area (A4809). Then, the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4810), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

After that, the game control device 100, the round number upper limit value (() corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (
In the case of the present embodiment, 16 or 6) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A4813). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A4814).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 issues a decorative special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern by RW.
Load it from the M decoration special command area and prepare it as a performance command (A4815).
Rendering command setting processing is executed (A4816). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to be the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a production command (A4817), and the production command A setting process is executed (A4818). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the presence/absence of the sitting one shot effect execution flag and the upper limit of the number of rounds set in the special figure information setting process is prepared as an effect command (A4819), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A4820).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare time corresponding to the presence or absence of the sitting one shot effect execution flag (A4821), and clears the sitting one shot effect execution flag (A482).
2). For example, the fanfare time is 1 when there is no sitting one-shot effect execution flag.
0000 ms is set, and if there is a sitting one shot effect execution flag, 100 ms is set.

After that, the game control device 100, the big hit fanfare time (eg 10,000 mse
c) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4823). Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A4824), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4825). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 is executed (A4826), and the special figure displaying processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state. For example, in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Details of the fanfare/interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described below. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the special game state by +1 (A5701).
, A round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) is prepared as an effect command (A5702), and effect command setting processing (A5703) is performed.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5704), and sets the processing number to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the special winning opening ( (A5705), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5706)
.. After that, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the mouth count area is cleared (A5708). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5709), and the processing during the fanfare/interval ends.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (A2612) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of this embodiment.

The game control device 100, first, the current round number and RW in the special game state under execution.
It is determined whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing it with the upper limit number of rounds in the upper limit number of rounds area of M (A5901). If it is not the final round (result of A5901 is "N"), an interval command related to the interval between the rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5902), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5904).

When it is the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state as a production command (A5903). , Execute performance command setting process (
A5904).

After that, the processing number is set to "5" related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A5905), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5906). Remaining sphere processing time (for example, 1.
9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5907), and then OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5908), and the special winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored and the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the public figure.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

If the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100,
Regular figure normal processing that monitors the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the universal figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing processing during the universal figure variation Execute (A7608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). Details of the normal figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure is performed to set the opening time and information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure (A7610). Details of the processing for displaying a general figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the normal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process in the figure is executed (A7611). Figure 3
0 will be described later.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the per-universal-diagram end process (A7612). ).

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the regular symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A7604).
If the result is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 is executed.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a normal figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area for ordinary figures of RWM (for the number of reserved 1), and the random number storage area for symbols of RWM is (
Load a random number per design from (holding number 1), and clear the random number per universal figure storage area (for holding number 1) and the random number per universal figure storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A7902) .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in the high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, whether it is a time-saving state (a state of the universal power support state). It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7904).
), if the figure high probability is in progress (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the figure high probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 is performed. Process shifts to.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. When the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is,
If the result is yes, the process moves to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

The game control device 100, when the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y”), that is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Furthermore, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7909), the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number. The stop symbol information is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per ordinary figure (A7916), and clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917).
), the number of reservations for the universal map is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
6 is 1500 msec, and probability is 16/256, 3000 msec. Then, the process shift setting process during normal figure change is executed (A7921), and the normal day routine process ends. In the universal figure changing process transition setting process, in order to shift to the universal figure changing process, "1" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the universal figure holding number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), and set "0" as the process number for shifting to the ordinary process (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary figure normal processing is ended.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the processing for changing the figure-to-body figure (A7609) in the figure-to-body game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of changing the universal figure.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a general figure (A8301), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the universal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the result of the universal figure variation display game on the universal figure display in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of variation of the universal figure (normal symbol 1 varying signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the universal figure variation control flag area (A8).
305), and the process of changing the universal map ends.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the normal figure displaying process (A7610) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of displaying a general figure.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or deviance information) set in the normal figure normal process (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A84).
02). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

If the hit information is set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 (A8403).
Result is “Y”), the hitting process setting table is set (A8404), the hit start pointer value (here, 0 or 5) corresponding to the figure stopping symbol information is acquired, and the figure hitting control pointer area Save to (A8405). Further, the hit end pointer value (here, 4 or 7) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure end pointer area (A8406).
). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 1700 msec or 2) corresponding to the universal pattern stop symbol information
(600 msec) is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it becomes possible to open it three times or twice.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays "3" as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting a normal figure.
Is set (A8408), and the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A840).
9). After that, the signal regarding the hit of the general figure variation display game (normal pattern 1 hit signal is on)
Then, the signal related to the start of normal power operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid, the on data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area (A8411).
..

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information on the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (A8412), and determines the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the fraud monitoring period. The stored information on the fraudulent prize winning number area is stored (A8413). Lastly, the flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100, when the hit information is not set in the hit flag (A840
The result of 3 is "N"), and "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the ordinary figure normal process (A
8415), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A8416). afterwards,
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing for displaying the universal figure is ended.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (A7611) in the normal figure game process will be described. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of hitting a normal figure.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a control pointer for a normal figure (A860).
1) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded general-purpose hit control pointer reaches the value of the hit-genuine hit control pointer upper limit area (a hit end value) (A8602).

And, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit does not reach the value in the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure hit (the result of A8602 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls during the universal figure hit. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). In addition, the normal operation shift setting process is executed (A
8604), and ends the process of hitting a universal figure. In the normal power transfer setting process, the normal power solenoid 3
While controlling the turning on/off of 7c, the wait time and the normal electric opening time are acquired and saved in the general figure game processing timer area.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), In step A8603, the normal/universal hitting process control pointer area is not updated (+1), but the normal electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal/universal figure hitting process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. 31A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 31B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing processing, the starting opening error monitoring processing (A2009) and the payout command transmitting processing (A13)
05), winning a prize switch/state monitoring process (A1308), illegal magnet monitoring process (A1312)
), a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313), and setting the same in an output buffer I do.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9501). If a switch error is occurring (result of A9501 is “N”),
Off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9502).
). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9503).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9504). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (A9504 result is “N”),
It is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9505).
.. When the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9505 is "N"), OFF data of door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9506), and OFF data of security signal is output as external information output data. Save to area (A9507).

If the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9504 is “Y”), or if the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9505 is “Y”), the game control device 100
The ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9508), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9509).

After the steps A9507 and A9509, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9510), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). A determination is made (A9511). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process).
). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9512) and the process proceeds to step A9513. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A9511 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A9513). It should be noted that it can be determined that the magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether the board radio wave malfunction is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

If the board radio wave is not occurring, the game control device 100 (the result of A9514 is “N”)
Further, it is determined whether or not a special winning opening fraud is occurring (A9515). If the fraudulent-prize-winning flag relating to the special winning opening is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the fraudulent winning opening is occurring. If the special winning mouth fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is "
N”), and further, it is determined whether or not the illegal attempt to generate a universal telephone is occurring (A9516). In the case where the illegal power transmission is not occurring (the result of A9516 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the starting opening error is occurring (A9517). It should be noted that when the error occurring flag is saved in the starting opening error flag area, it can be determined that the starting opening error is occurring. When the start opening error is not occurring (A
The result of 9517 is “N”), and it is further determined whether or not frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9).
518).

On the other hand, in the gaming control device 100, when the magnet malfunction is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y
)), when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “Y”), the special winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9515 is “Y”), and the universal telephone fraud is occurring (A9516
Result of "Y"), or when the start opening error is occurring (result of A9517 is "Y")
, Save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A951)
9). After that, save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9520), main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9521).

Even when the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring, the game control device 100 (the result of A9518 is “N”).
), the main prize ball signal editing process is executed (A9521). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (A9522).

Next, the game control device 100, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9523). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is 0 (A9524). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9524 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data. The data is saved in the area (A9525), and the external information editing process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is not 0 (A952
4 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9526), and the external information editing process ends.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 32
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0.
008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. A performance button input process is executed (B0009). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystal by the player (B0010). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0011), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0012). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display edit processing of updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B0013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B00).
14).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0014). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0015 is “N”), the processing of B0015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is frame switching timing (result of B0015 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
016). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0017).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B0018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0019). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory motion effect.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0019 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0019 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the received command check processing (B0012) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), the contents of the received command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is "Y" when the copying is completed.
]), the received command content of the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 33) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit type command (
B1207). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (fanfare screen, round screen display, etc.) related to the effect during the big hit. For example, a fanfare command (A4819), a round command (A5702), and an interval command (A
5902) and ending command (A5903). When the MODE part indicates a big hit system command (result of B1207 is "Y"), big hit system command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (
B1209). In addition, in the symbol system command, there is a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (those set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process). When the MODE part indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol command processing is executed (B
1210) and terminates the received command analysis process.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol-based command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes a read-ahead stop symbol command (A3 in FIG. 14).
008, A3018). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command process is executed (B1214),
The received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then the MODE section determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation type commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command (A
3022). Then, when the MODE part indicates a prefetching variable type command (B12
The result of 15 is "Y"), the prefetching variable system command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot system command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1
The result of 303 is "Y"), and the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (
(B1304), the single command processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (
The result of B1303 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command for power failure recovery (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power recovery, (
The result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), and then the MODE part displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2907).
, A3304) is represented (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the MODE control unit next causes the MODE part to display the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2
907, A3307) is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (B1315). The error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. And MO
If the DE part represents an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316),
Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a production mode switching command. The determination is made (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1).
318) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1319). In addition, the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 and the symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1319 is “Y”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1320).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1320 is “Y”)
The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1321), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1322), and ends the single shot system command process. In the process of B1322, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to “in change”, “in big hit”, “in small hit” depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1319 is "N
)) or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1320 is “N”)
In effect, the production control device 300 ends the single-shot system command processing.

In the single-shot system command processing, when the MODE part represents the setting information command,
RAM for setting information (setting values) regarding the game conditions of the gaming machine 10 included in the setting information command
The process may be stored in.

[Special map 1 Hold information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process (B1310) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 36A shows an effect control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 reservation information setting processing performed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (first starting memory number information) (B1401a). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decorative special figure 1 reserved number (first starting memory number) acquired from the decorative special figure 1 reserved number command. For example, when the number of decorative special map 1 reserved increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time, the number of decorative special map 1 reserved and the number of decorative special map 2 reserved do not increase alternately in the normal game state, and the number of decorative special map 1 reserved continues. If the number increases, decorative special map 1
When the pre-reading command (pre-reading symbol system command or pre-reading variable system command) related to special figure 1 is received without receiving the reserved number command, the decorative special figure 1 reserved number command (first
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the starting memory number information). Decorative special drawing 1 Missing of the reserved number command may cause such an abnormality. In addition, the first start winning port 36
When the winning prize is alternately applied to the third starting winning opening 42, the number of decorative special figure 1 reserved and the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved are alternately increased.

Rendering control device 300, when there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (B1401a
Result is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number command error flag is set (B1402a), and the special figure 1
The special figure 1 hold number acquired from the hold number command is stored (B1403a). If the special figure 1 reserved number cannot be obtained from the abnormal decorative special figure 1 reserved number command, the process of B1403a need not be executed. When there is no abnormality in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1401a is "N"), the special figure 1 hold number command acquired from the special figure 1 hold number command is set without setting the special figure 1 hold number command error flag. The number is stored (B1403a). After that, the special figure 1 reservation information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 Hold information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the details of the special figure 2 hold information setting process (B1312) in the one-shot system command process (FIG. 35) described above will be described. FIG. 36B shows an effect control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 reservation information setting processing performed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (second starting memory number information) (B1401b). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 reservation number (second starting memory number) acquired from the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. For example, when the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved increases or decreases by 2 or more at a time, the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved and the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved do not increase alternately in the normal game state, and the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved continues. If it increases, decorative special map 2
If you do not receive the hold number command but receive only the read-ahead command (read-ahead symbol system command or read-ahead variable system command) related to special figure 2, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (second
It can be determined that there is an abnormality in the starting memory number information). Decorative special figure 2 Missing of the reserved number command may cause such an abnormality. In addition, the first start winning port 36
When the winning prize is alternately applied to the third starting winning opening 42, the number of decorative special figure 1 reserved and the number of decorative special figure 2 reserved are alternately increased.

Rendering control device 300, when there is an abnormality in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (B1401b
Result of "Y"), the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command error flag is set (B1402b), and the special figure 2 reservation number acquired from the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command is stored (B1403b). In addition,
If the special figure 2 pending number cannot be acquired from the abnormal decorative special figure 2 pending number command, B1403
It is not necessary to perform the processing of b. Decorative special drawing 2 If there is no abnormality in the number of pending commands (B140
The result of 1b is "N"), and the special figure 2 reserved number acquired from the decorative special figure 2 reserved number command is stored without setting the decorative special figure 2 reserved number command error flag (B1403b). afterwards,
Special figure 2 reservation information setting processing ends.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the prefetch symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 37 shows the production control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading pattern system command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after step B1602 and B1603, sets the prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag which shows that it is waiting to receive the prefetching variable system command (B160).
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. Then, the read-ahead symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30.
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetching variable system command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not there is a pending number command abnormality flag of the corresponding special drawing (special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) (B1701). The pending number command error flag of the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set by the special figure 1 pending information setting process (FIG. 36A) or the special figure 2 pending information setting process (FIG. 36B). is there. If there is no corresponding reserved figure command error flag (result of B1701 is “N”), the process from step B1703 is executed to change the prefetch variation system command (that is, the prefetch (predetermination) determination result). Look-ahead production based on (
Advance notice) is drawn and set.

Production control device 300, when there is a hold number command error flag of the corresponding special drawing (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) (result of B1701 is “Y”), that is, the corresponding special drawing reservation number command If there is an abnormality in the, the number of starting memories (the number of starting memories) indicated by the pending number command (starting memory number information) is below the upper limit number (B1702). Note that the upper limit is 4 in this embodiment. If the number is less than or equal to the upper limit (result of B1702 is “Y”), step B
The processes after 1703 are executed, and the prefetching effect based on the prefetching variable system command is drawn and set. In this way, even if there is an error in the hold number command of the corresponding special figure, if the starting memory number (hold number) indicated by the hold number command is less than or equal to the upper limit number, the prefetch effect is executed, so the hold number command It is possible to prevent a situation where the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect decreases due to an abnormality.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the starting storage number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command of the corresponding special figure exceeds the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) (result of B1702 is “N”), The prefetching variable system command processing is ended without setting the prefetching effect (preliminary effect) based on the prefetching variable system command (that is, the determination result of the prefetching (preliminary determination)).

When the number of starting storages (holding number) indicated by the holding number command of the corresponding special figure exceeds the upper limit number (result of B1702 is “N”), the prefetch effect currently being executed is optionally stopped. (B1717). Here, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect, a pre-reading zone effect, a pending change notice, etc., but all the pre-reading effects currently being executed may be stopped, or some of the pre-reading effects currently being executed may be stopped. May be.

As the process after step B1703, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the reception of the prefetching variable system command is waiting (B1703). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1703 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (the result of B1703 is "Y"), the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag is cleared (B1704).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board), the design of the latest pending information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)
Of the pre-reading variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of (B1705), and the sub pre-reading variable command MODE part corresponding to the MODE part of the pre-reading variable system command is acquired (
B1706). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1707), and the pre-read variation command ACT in the sub corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
The copy is acquired (B1708).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-preread variation command MODE part and ACT part) are both other than 0 (B1709).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1709 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) corresponding to the latest holding information and the number of holdings (B1710). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B171
1), it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1712).
).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation-type command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half variation corresponding to the sub prefetch change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system,
Temporarily, without changing the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation.
Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1709 is “N”), or , If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (B171
If the result of No. 2 is “N”), and the converted command is abnormal, the prefetching variable system command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1712 is “Y”), and the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (
B1713). Then, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading notice effect of the latest hold is generated (B17).
14). The prefetch notice effect is a type of prefetch effect, and is, for example, a pending change notice (holding change notice effect). The prefetching effect includes continuous notice effect, prefetch zone effect, and pending change notice.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a notice of pending change.
When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”)
The display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (B171).
4 is “N”), or when the prefetching notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is "N"), as it is. The read-ahead variable command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. Note that, for example, the symbol type is an outlier symbol or 5R
It corresponds to the probability variation big hit design, 5R normal big hit design, 16R probability variation big hit design, 16R normal big hit design.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the variable system command process (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1 of the fluctuation command which is received (fluctuation command)
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable system command processing ends.

Rendering control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (fluctuation command) (B1.
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable system command process (FIG. 40) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special figure type, and effect mode is set (B2002), and the variation is performed. The MODE part of the system command (variable command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not variation without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is variation with reach, in the number of points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type Set the corresponding first half notice distribution group address table (B
2004), the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special drawing type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (B2007), and the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable system command is set. Is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for a notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable effect (B2013) and the display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set (hold shift), and, for example, an animation for reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Next, a voice number that determines the presentation mode by the speaker and a decoration number that determines the presentation operation of the decoration device are set (B2016).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special map variation corresponding to the special drawing type (B
2017), the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 is performed (B2018). In addition, the fourth symbol variation is caused by the lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LE of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
It is displayed in D).

[Big hit type command processing]
Next, the details of the big hit system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 34) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the big hit system command is a fanfare command, a fanfare production setting process for setting a fanfare production is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information about the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
The fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit value of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
If the result of 4 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game status flag is set to be in the round (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the performance control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
If the result of 07 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the game status flag to during the interval (B2108, B2109
), the big hit system command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent the interval (B210
7 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B
The result of 2110 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and ends the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state). Medium is set (B2111, B2112), and the big hit system command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received big hit command does not indicate the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot system command processing without executing any processing.

[Variation pattern]
43 and 44 are diagrams for explaining an example of setting the variation pattern (variation mode) according to the present embodiment, and show a part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table. In addition, the game control device 100, the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3021, A3406, A3
506), the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table are used as the fluctuation pattern table when determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number, fluctuation mode).

FIG. 43 shows a part of the contents of the variation group table and the variation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit. FIG. 43(a) shows a variation group table when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, in the normal game state. As described above, the normal game state is a low probability state (normal probability state) and is not a time saving state.

The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table are: normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, S
There are a P3 reach system and a full rotation reach system, and assigned values are set for each.

The variation group is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1. The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535, and for example, 2008 values are assigned to the normal reach system when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit. That is, when the result is 16R probability variation A big hit, the normal reach type variation group is selected with a probability of 2008/65536.

FIG. 43B shows the contents of the normal reach type variation pattern selection table used when the normal reach type variation group is selected in the variation group table of FIG. 43A. The fluctuation patterns that can be selected by this fluctuation pattern selection table are
There are three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 77 to 79, which are all normal reach, and the respective distribution values are set.

The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation pattern selection table and the variation pattern random number 2. The fluctuation pattern random number 2 has a value of 0 to 255,
For example, the fluctuation pattern number 77 is assigned 216 values. That is,
The variation pattern of variation pattern number 77 is selected with a probability of 216/256.

FIG. 44 shows a part of the contents of the fluctuation group table and the fluctuation pattern selection table when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of alignment. FIG. 44(a) shows a variation group table in the case where the effect mode is the normal effect mode, that is, in the normal game state. As described above, the normal game state is a low probability state (normal probability state) and is not a time saving state.

The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table include normal variation (no reach) 1 system, normal variation (no reach) 2 system, normal reach system, SP0 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system. There is a system.

FIG. 44B shows a variation pattern selection table of the normal variation (without reach) 1 system used when the variation group of the normal variation (without reach) 1 system is selected in the variation group table of FIG. 44A. The contents of

The variation patterns selectable by the variation pattern selection table include three variation patterns with variation pattern numbers 2 to 4 which are all reachless. When the total number of holdings, which is the total of the number of holdings (starting storage number) of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, is 0 to 2, and is 3, the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern number 2 (the fluctuation time is the shortest The fluctuation pattern of shortening fluctuation) is not selected. When the total pending number is 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (variation pattern of ultra-shortening variation having the shortest variation time) can be selected. Further, when the total pending number is 7 to 8, the variation pattern of variation pattern number 2 (variation pattern of ultra-shortened variation having the shortest variation time) is most easily selected. For example, the case where the total number of reservations (the total of the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2) is 0 is a case where the total number of reservations is 0 (for example, waiting for customers).

[Premonition production]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect using the board effect device 44 and the display device 41. This precursor effect is a kind of pre-reading notice effect (preliminary change notice) that suggests the pre-reading result, and is started and ended during the variation display of one special figure variation display game. In the present embodiment, as the precursor effect, the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is operated, and an effect of switching the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display device 41 is executed in conjunction with the operation.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a timing chart when executing the precursor effect. 46 and 47 show an example of the operation of the movable accessory 671 and the display of the display device 41 in the indication effect.

In (A) of FIG. 46, a variable display area 610 for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game is provided in the center of the display screen (display section, display area) of the display device 41. In the variable display area 610, the decorative special symbol variable display game is executed by displaying the decorative special symbols (identification information) on the left, the center, and the right in a variable manner and then stopping the display.

Further, a hold display unit 630 that displays a hold display 633 (standby hold display) corresponding to an undigested starting memory (hold) is provided below the display unit (display area) of the display device 41. The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory and is arranged in the memory order. The holding display 633 at the left end is the holding display 633 corresponding to the first stored starting memory (first starting memory or second starting memory), and shifts to the left (holding shift) each time it is consumed. (B2015 etc.). In addition, the result of the special figure variation display game and the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) such as the variation pattern based on each starting memory are displayed in a corresponding pending display 633.
Can be suggested by the display mode of.

On the left side of the hold display section 630 (standby hold display section), a hold digestion area 640 (change-pending hold) that displays information about the starting memory during digestion (starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed) A display section, a pending execution display section, a changing pending display area, and a specific display section) are provided.
In the present embodiment, the hold display 633 at the left end of the hold display portion 630 is moved (hold shift) to the hold exhaustion area 640 at the start of the special figure variation display game. Also,
It is possible to suggest the result and variation pattern of the running special figure variation display game by the display mode of the variation pending display 643 (digest pending display) displayed in the pending digest area 640.

Further, in a corner portion (for example, an upper left corner portion) of the display unit of the display device 41, a decorative special symbol (first identification information, which is variably displayed in enlarged display (main display, normal display) in the variable display area 610. Variable display of small symbols (second identification information, reduced symbols) that are relatively smaller than large symbols and enlarged symbols)
A variable display area 615 (reduced display) (variable display portion for small symbols) is provided. Further, in the corner of the display unit of the display device 41 (for example, the upper right corner), the number of undigested starting memories (the number of special map 1 reserved, the number of special map 2 reserved) is displayed by a number. A number display section 650 (special figure 1 numeral reservation display section) and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 (special figure 2 figure reservation display section) are provided. Note that, instead of the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660, the reserved number display section (numerical figure reserved) that displays the total reserved number that is the sum of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number A display unit) may be provided.

Further, as shown in (A) of FIG. 46, the board effect device 44 includes a movable accessory 671 having a shape imitating a teammate character having a spear. The movable accessory 671 is, for example, the display device 4
It is possible to move up and down between the display unit (display area) of No. 1 and the position where it does not overlap front and back and the position where it overlaps. Further, it is configured to be movable left and right without overlapping with the display section of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction, and to be movable left and right with overlapping with the display section of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction.

Here, the position where the display unit of the display device 41 does not overlap with the front and rear (the state where it does not overlap) is a position where most (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit with the front and rear (a state where it does not overlap). is there. The position (overlapping state) that overlaps the display unit of the display device 41 in the front-rear direction is a position (overlapping state) in which most (for example, half or more) of the movable accessory 671 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 is used as the indication effect.
Of the specific hold display 633 (hereinafter, referred to as “specific hold display”) is acted on by the movable accessory 671, and the display mode of the specific hold display is suggested by the action of the movable accessory 671 on the particular hold display. The effect of whether to change to the mode (holding change) is executed.

Here, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 in a suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory or the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern. (Pending change notice). Further, by displaying the hold display 633 displayed in the hold exhaustion area 640 in a suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest the result or change pattern of the special figure change display game being executed.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character at a predetermined timing (in the case of the present embodiment, the start of the precursor effect), and then the specific hold is performed. Although the movable accessory 671 is acted on the display (in the present embodiment, a spear is pierced), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, the effect control device 300 starts the hold shift effect in which the hold display 633 is shifted to the adjacent side (t11). Specifically, as shown in (A) of FIG. 46, when the special figure variation display game ends and as shown in (A) of FIG. 46, the next special figure variation display game starts, the hold display 633. Shifts to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, in the case where the special map variation display game of this time is the special figure variation display game that is won in the lottery of the omen effect, the effect control device 300 indicates the end of the hold shift production. Production is started (t12). The sign effect lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the sign effect, and when the lottery for the sign effect is won, the sign effect is executed during the variable display of the winning special figure variation display game. It The lottery for the indication effect is performed, for example, in the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 41).

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in (c) of FIG. 46, the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the normal display mode to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and the movable accessory 6 is displayed.
71 is a position (first position) where the display unit (display area) does not overlap with the front and rear positions (first position).
2nd position).

Next, as shown in (d) of FIG. 47, in a state where the movable accessory 671 overlaps the display unit in the front-rear direction (that is, in front of the display unit), from the second position, the tip of the spear is in the specific reserved display and the front-back direction. To the action position (third position) where the movable accessory 671 can act on the specific reserved display. The movable accessory 671 may be capable of swinging down a spear, for example,
In that case, if the spear is swung down in a state where the movable accessory 671 arrives at the action position, the tip of the spear may be overlapped with the specific reserved display in the front and back.

Next, in the case where the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the start memory that is won in the lottery of the hold change notice (the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display 633 and suggests the look-ahead result), FIG. As shown in (e), the display mode of the specific hold display changes from the display mode imitating the enemy character to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the starting memory that is selected in the lottery for the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode (that is, the enemy character is displayed). The precursor effect is finished while the simulated display mode is maintained or the display mode imitating the enemy character is returned to the normal display mode).

The hold change notice lottery is a lottery for determining whether to execute the hold change notice, and when the lottery for the hold change notice is won, the display mode of the hold display 633 corresponding to the winning start memory is It changes to the suggestion mode at a predetermined timing. The lottery for the pending change notice is, for example,
This is performed in the prefetch lottery process (B1713) of the prefetch variable system command process (FIG. 38).

Next, as shown in FIG. 45, when the precursor effect is finished, the effect control device 300 starts an accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 671 returns to the initial position (first position) (t13). In particular,
As shown in (f) of FIG. 47, the movable accessory 671 is at an operating position (third position) where the movable accessory 671 and the display part overlap each other in the front and rear.
Position) to a non-overlapping position (4th position). Next, the movable accessory 671 moves from the fourth position to the initial position (first position) without overlapping the front and rear of the display unit.

In this way, the indication effect is executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Therefore, when the execution time of the aura effect is longer than the variation time of the special figure variation display game, the end timing of the aura effect is later than the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game, and therefore the aura effect is the cause. Then, there arises a disadvantage that the effect to be executed after the end of the variation cannot be executed as planned. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is shorter than the execution time of the aura effect, the control for canceling the execution of the aura effect or the aura is performed. The control was performed to end the production on the way. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order not to cause inconvenience such as the effect that is scheduled to be executed after the end of the variation cannot be executed as planned without performing such control, the execution time of the precursor effect is Shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the execution time of the precursor effect (t12 to t13).
) Is the variation time (t11 to t14) of the special figure variation display game that is started when the total number of reservations, which is the sum of the numbers of special figure 1 and special figure 2, is the upper limit number (8 in this embodiment). Shorter than.
There are various fluctuation times of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the special figure fluctuation display game that can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect has the shortest fluctuation time. It is a special figure variation display game that is executed in the normal effect mode (normal game state) without, and is a special figure variation display game that is started when the total pending number is the upper limit number (8 in this embodiment) ( FIG. 44(b)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the execution time value of the precursor effect is
This is a special figure variation display game that is executed in the normal effect mode without a reach and variation pattern, and starts when the total number of reservations (the total number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2) is the upper limit number. It is set to be smaller than the variation time value of the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as "holding MAX variation"). As a result, the end timing of the precursor effect comes before the variation end timing of the special figure variation display game regardless of the number of unsatisfied starting memories (total pending number) when starting the special figure variation display game. That is, the sign effect can be executed (executed from the beginning to the end) in any special figure variation display game.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started, the hold display 633 is displayed.
When the hold shift effect of shifting to the next is started and the hold shift effect ends, the precursor effect starts. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the precursor effect is prohibited during the hold shift effect, and the predictive effect starts after the start of the change. Accordingly, even if the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX variation, the end timing of the precursor effect may be the special figure variation display game depending on the length of the execution time of the precursor effect and the start timing of the precursor effect. There may be a case after the fluctuation end timing of.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the predictive effect is started after the hold shift effect, the end timing of the predictive effect is set to be earlier than the change end timing of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG.
As shown in, the time from the start of the hold shift effect to the end of the precursor effect (t11 to t13)
Is made shorter than the fluctuation time (t11 to t14) of the pending MAX fluctuation. That is, the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect is set to be smaller than the change time value of the change of the hold MAX.

Note that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the precursor effect may be set to be the same as the change time value of the hold MAX change, but the result mode of the decorative special figure change display game is the movable combination. From the viewpoint of avoiding inconvenience such as difficulty in seeing the object 671, it is preferable that the movable accessory 671 does not overlap the display unit of the display device 41 at the end of the variable display of the special figure variable display game. Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding the inconvenience that it is difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the specific hold display is changed at the end of the variable display of the special figure variable display game. The switching (change) is preferably completed.

Furthermore, when the precursor effect is finished, the accessory return effect in which the movable accessory 671 returns to the initial position (first position) is started. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the effect return effect is finished after the timing (t15) at which the next special figure variation display game starts.
It is possible to make the timing of ending the character effect production the same as the timing of the start of the next special figure variation display game, or the timing before the start of the next special figure variation display game, By setting the timing at which the character effect production is finished after the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the precursor production.

The sign presentation is not limited to the one using the board presentation device 44 and the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate, and the frame decoration device 18, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub display device, and the board presentation device 44. Any device using at least one board decoration device 46 or the like may be used. For example, instead of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44, the character image G1 of the ally character holding a spear may be displayed on the display device 41, and the character image G1 may be caused to act as the specific reserved display.

FIG. 48 shows another example of the display of the display device 41 in the indication effect. The aforementioned movable accessory 67
Instead of 1, the character image G1 of the display device 41 is used.

When the precursor effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (S), the character image G1 appears on the display unit of the display device 41. Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), the character image G1 moves to a position (action position) where the specific hold display can be applied. Next, in the case where the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the starting memory that is won in the lottery of the hold change notice,
As shown in (S) of FIG. 48, the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the starting memory that is selected in the lottery for the hold change notice, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. .. Then, when the precursor effect is finished, a character exit effect (an effect equivalent to a character effect effect) in which the character image G1 exits from the operating position is started. As a result, the character image G1 disappears from the display unit.

The timing to start displaying the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the character image G1 may appear before the start of the precursor effect. Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding the inconvenience that it is difficult to understand that the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed, the character image G1 is also stopped and displayed during the stop display of the special figure variable display game. Preferably. Therefore, it is preferable that the character exit effect is started after the stop display of the special figure variation display game is finished (for example, when the next special figure variation display game is started).

Further, the character image displayed on the display device 41 in place of the movable accessory 671 of the board effect device 44 is not limited to the character image G1 of the teammate character holding the spear, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the way of moving the character image G1 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the shape of the movable accessory 671 described above is not limited to a shape imitating a teammate character having a spear, and can be appropriately changed. Further, the moving manner of the movable accessory 671 can be appropriately changed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the cover member 40f may be provided in front of the movable accessory 671 which does not overlap the display unit of the display device 41 in the front and rear. In this case, for example, in FIG.
As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 9(a), when the movable accessory 671 does not overlap with the front and rear of the display unit of the display device 41, all (or more than half) of the movable accessory 671 is covered. It becomes invisible (difficult to see) because it is hidden by the member 40f. On the other hand, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 49( a ), when the movable accessory 671 is in a state of overlapping with the display unit of the display device 41 in the front and back, all (or more than half) of the movable accessory 671. However, it is visible without being hidden by the cover member 40f.

Further, when a plurality of precursor effects having different execution time values can be executed, all the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation, Only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 49B shows a case where only some of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects are set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), it is possible to execute a precursor effect A having an execution time of 2 seconds, a predictive effect B having an execution time of 3 seconds, and a predictive effect C having an execution time of 8 seconds. The predictive effect whose execution time value is smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the lottery is executed. That is, when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is the ultra-shortening variation (variation time 4 seconds) or the abbreviated variation (variation time 8 seconds) shown in FIG. The predictive effect selected from A and the predictive effect B may be executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game. When the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is the normal variation (variation time of 14 seconds) shown in FIG. 44B, etc., from the aura effect A, the aura effect B, and the aura effect C. The selected sign effect may be executed during the variable display of the special figure variable display game.

Of course, also in this case, the precursor effect is set such that the sum of the execution time value of the hold shift effect and the execution time value of the predictive effect is smaller than the fluctuation time value of the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the predictive effect. It is also possible to select.

Further, when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is the hold MAX variation, the aura effect with the shortest execution time may be executed. That is, FIG. 49(b)
In the example shown in (1), when the special figure variation display game won in the lottery of the aura effect is an ultra-shortening variation of the variation time of 4 seconds (hold MAX variation in the present embodiment), only the aura effect A can be selected. The indication effect B and the indication effect C may not be selected.

Further, when the predictive effect is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games, all execution time values of the plurality of predictive effect that are continuously executed are smaller than the variable time value of the hold MAX fluctuation. It may be set, or only some of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed may be set to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the pending MAX fluctuation.

Further, the first indication effect executed among the plurality of consecutive indication effects is more likely to be executed during the hold MAX variation than the second indication effect executed thereafter and thereafter. For this reason, when setting only a part of the execution time values of the plurality of precursor effects continuously executed to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX variation, the execution time of the precursor effect executed at least at the first time. It is preferable to set the value smaller than the fluctuation time value of the hold MAX fluctuation.

FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a predictive presentation effect that is executed together with the pseudo continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo continuous presentation effect).

The effect control device 300 of the present embodiment can execute the decorative special figure variation display game in a pseudo-variation variation mode in which unit variation display in which identification information is variably displayed and then temporarily stopped is performed multiple times to derive a result aspect. .. When the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation mode has a value smaller than the fluctuation time value at the time of holding MAX, the execution time value of the precursor effect is changed to the fluctuation of the unit fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation mode. It is possible to set it smaller than any one of the time values (for example, the fluctuation time value of the unit fluctuation display having the shortest fluctuation time). Pseudo continuous variation mode (so-called pseudo continuous effect) means that the identification information (decorative special symbol) is pseudo-stopped after fluctuating display between the start of variation display and the stop result display in one decorative special figure variation display game. This is an effect in which unit fluctuation display to be displayed (temporary stop display) is performed multiple times. In the pseudo-repeating variation mode of the present embodiment, when the temporary stop display is performed, the pseudo-repeating exclusive pattern (pseudo-repeating symbol) indicating the pseudo-repeating variation mode is stopped and displayed.

Temporary stop time in pseudo continuous variation mode (time between unit fluctuation display and next unit fluctuation display)
Than that, it is possible to execute a precursor effect having a shorter execution time. In the decorative special figure variation display game in the pseudo-continuous variation mode, for example, as shown in (T) of FIG. 50, the first unit variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation mode is completed, and then shown in (H) of FIG. As such, among the decorative special symbols (identification information) displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas 610, the pseudo-relational exclusive pattern that appears only during the pseudo-repetition variation (for example, includes the character "ream"). Only the pattern composed of) remains, and it is notified that the pseudo-repeating fluctuation is in progress. Then, as shown in FIG.
The unit fluctuation display for the second time starts. In this case, the indication effect is executed while the fact that the pseudo continuous variation is being informed is given.

Specifically, for example, as shown in (h) of FIG. 50, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) moves to the operating position while the fact that the pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation is being reported. .. In other words, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) acts on the specific pending display while the fact that the pseudo continuous variation is being notified. Then, as shown in (T) of FIG. 50, when the second unit variable display is started, the character image G1 (or the movable accessory 671 or the like) exits from the operating position.

FIG. 51 shows an example of a case where the character image forming the decorative special symbol acts on the specific hold display in the sign effect in which the execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time in the pseudo continuous variation mode.
The character image that acts on the specific hold display may be a character image that constitutes a decorative special symbol.

For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 51, the pseudo-relational exclusive pattern is composed of a character image (for example, a character image "ream") and a character image (for example, an image simulating a cloud). And FIG.
As shown in (d), while the fact that the pseudo-repeating fluctuation is in progress is being notified, the character image forming the pseudo-repeating exclusive symbol acts on the specific reserved display. Then, when the specific hold display is the hold display 633 corresponding to the starting memory that is won in the lottery of the hold change notice, as shown in (nu) of FIG. 51, the display mode of the particular hold display is suggested. It changes into a mode.

Of course, not only the indication effect executed during the temporary stop time in the pseudo continuous variation mode (the indication effect whose execution time is shorter than the temporary stop time), but also the indication effect executed during the variation display of the special figure variation display game ( In a sign effect etc. in which the execution time is shorter than the variation time of the hold MAX variation), the character image forming the decorative special symbol may be applied to the specific hold display instead of the movable accessory 671 and the character image G1.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an indication as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 is changed to the suggestion mode is performed as the precursor effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The precursor effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed in the hold digestion area 640 changes to the suggestion mode.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state for giving a game value to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of the starting condition and stores it as starting memory of the variable display game (game control device 100), and a predetermined notice effect (precursor) during execution of the variable display game. The production control means (production control device 300) for executing the production). The variable display game (pending) started when the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect reaches the predetermined upper limit number (8 in the present embodiment) of the number of start memories stored in the start storage means. MAX
Fluctuation) is smaller than the fluctuation time value.

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time is the shortest), the notice effect (precursor effect) is executed in any fluctuation display game. You can

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) (in the case of the present embodiment, the hold shift A predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) is started after the effect is finished), and the sum of the execution time value of the predetermined notice effect and the value of the predetermined time (in the present embodiment, the execution time value of the hold shift effect). Is a variable display game (holding MA) which is started in a state where the number of starting memories stored in the starting storage means (game control means 100) has reached a predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment).
It can be configured to be smaller than the fluctuation time value of (X fluctuation).

With this configuration, the indication effect starts later than the start of the special figure variation display game, so that it is possible to provide a period in which the indication effect is not executed while the player has the expectation for the execution of the indication effect. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. The sign effect may be started at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can control the operation of the movable accessory 671 used for the predetermined notice effect (precursor effect), and the effect of the predetermined notice effect can be obtained. After that, a return effect (effect return effect) for returning the movable accessory 671 to the initial position can be executed, and the return effect is performed after the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the predetermined notice effect is executed. It can be configured to end during the running of the floating display game that starts.

With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the precursor effect.
The special figure variation display game that is being executed when the character return production is finished is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed next to the special figure variation display game in which the precursor effect is executed. Further, the character effect returning effect may be ended during execution of the special figure variation display game in which the indication effect is executed (including the end of the special figure variation display game in which the indication effect is executed).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball in the start winning area is executed, and the variable display game is executed. When the result is a special result, a special game state for giving a game value to the player is generated. The starting winning area includes a first starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting winning area (second starting winning opening 97, normal variation winning device 37). The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning area and stores it as a first starting memory, and also a predetermined random number based on the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting winning area. A start storage unit (game control device 100) that is extracted and stored as a second start memory, and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) that executes a predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) during execution of the variable display game. Prepare The execution time of the predetermined notice effect is shorter than the change time of the variable display game (hold MAX change) which is started in a state where the total number of holdings reaches the predetermined upper limit number (8 in this embodiment).

Therefore, since the execution time of the precursor effect is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hold MAX fluctuation (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation time is the shortest), the notice effect (precursor effect) is executed in any fluctuation display game. You can

In the present embodiment, both the variation patterns of the first special figure variation display game and the variation patterns of the second special figure variation display game are configured to be selected in consideration of the total pending number (total starting memory number). It is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is selected in consideration of the number of special figure 1 holdings (the number of the first starting memory), and the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is the special figure 2 holding It is also possible to configure the selection in consideration of the number (the number of the second starting memories). In this case, in the first special figure variation display game which has the shortest variation time in the first special figure variation display games that can be won in the lottery of the indication effect, the number of holding special figures 1 is the upper limit number (for example, 4). It is the first special figure variation display game (hold MAX variation) that is started at the time of the second special figure variation display game which has the shortest variation time in the second special figure variation display game that can be won in the lottery of the precursor effect. Is a second special figure variation display game (hold MAX variation) that is started when the number of pending figures in special figure 2 is the upper limit number (for example, 4).

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined notice effect (precursor effect) is such that the number of the first starting memories or the number of the second starting memories reaches the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). It can be configured to be shorter than the variation time of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) which is started in the state of being on. With such a configuration, the execution time of the precursor effect is changed to the hold MAX variation (
That is, since the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game with the shortest fluctuation time, the notice effect (precursor effect) can be executed in any fluctuation display game.

In the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game is executed in the winning order in the start winning area, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, one special figure variation display game (for example, second special figure variation display). The game may be preferentially executed.

[Variations of precursor production]
The aura effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 51 is the character image that appears on the display unit of the display device 41 (
Alternatively, it is a precursor effect of a type (hereinafter referred to as a “first type precursor effect”) in which a movable accessory or the like that appears in a position overlapping with the display unit in the front and back always moves to the action position. In addition to (or in place of) the first type of aura effect, a type of aura effect in which an appearing character image (or an appearing movable accessory or the like) may or may not move to the action position ( Hereinafter, it is also possible to configure so as to execute "a second type of omen effect".

In the second type of omen effect, when the lottery for omen effect is won, the action possibility lottery is performed.
The action availability lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to move the character image to the action position, and when the action availability production lottery is won, the character is displayed during execution of the winning special figure variation display game. The image moves to the working position. That is, when the action availability lottery is won, the character image appears and moves to the action position. On the other hand, when the character is selected in the action possibility lottery, the character image appears but does not move to the action position.

Further, in the second type of aura effect, after performing the action possibility lottery, the changing pending change effect lottery is performed. The lottery for the changing pending change effect is performed by changing the pending pending change effect (holding extinction area 640
This is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the effect of suggesting the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed by changing the display mode of the variation pending display 643. When the lottery for the changing pending change effect is won, the pending pending display 643 displayed in the pending digestion area 640 (the specific pending display in the present modification) during the execution of the winning special figure changing display game. The display mode of changes to the suggested mode. That is, when the lottery for the changing pending change effect is won, the display mode of the specific pending display changes to the suggesting mode. On the other hand, when the lottery for the changing pending change effect is lost, the display mode of the specific pending display does not change to the suggestion mode.

The action possibility lottery and the lottery for the changing pending change effect are, for example, the changing effect setting process (FIG. 41).
The preliminary lottery (B2006 or B2009) will be conducted.

52A to 52C show an example of the action availability lottery table. In the action availability lottery table, the probability that action is selected (that is, the probability of winning) and no action are selected depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit or the result is off. The probability (that is, the probability of losing) is defined.

For example, in the case where the action availability lottery table shown in FIG. 52A is set, if the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, there is a 60% chance of winning and the special execution executed this time. If the result of the figure variation display game is out of proportion, there is a 70% chance of winning.

Production control device 300 selects one action availability lottery table from a plurality of action availability lottery tables (three types of action availability lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52(a) to (c)), for example, based on the game state. And set.

52(d) to (g) show an example of the changing pending change effect lottery table. In the changing pending change effect lottery table, when the action possibility lottery is won and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game executed this time is a big hit, and when the action possibility lottery is won and the special figure executed this time If the result of the variable display game is out of proportion, it is defeated in the action possibility lottery, and if the result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, it is defeated in the action possibility lottery, and it is executed this time. The probability that a pending change is selected (that is, a winning probability) and the probability that a pending change is not selected (that is, a losing probability) when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order are defined.

For example, in the case where the changing pending change effect lottery table shown in FIG. 52(d) is set, when the action possibility lottery is won and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit. There is a 70% chance of winning the action possibility lottery, and if the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is out of proportion, there is an 80% chance of winning and losing to the action possibility lottery, and If the result of the special map change display game to be executed this time is a big hit, there is a 15% probability that the player wins the prize and loses to the action possibility lottery, and the result of the special map change display game to be executed this time is out of proportion. Won't win.

In addition, whichever of the four types of changing pending change effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 52(d) to (g) is set, when the action availability lottery is lost, the changing pending change effect lottery is selected. Only when the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, the character image G2 does not act on the specific hold display, while the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a big hit confirmation.

Production control device 300, for example, based on the game state, one of a plurality of pending change changing effect lottery table during change (four types of pending change changing effect lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (d) ~ (g)). Select and set the floating pending change effect lottery table.

Note that, in the present modification, as the second-type predictive effect, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the changing pending display 643 displayed in the pending digestion area 640 is changed to the suggesting mode is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. The second-type predictive effect may be, for example, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 is changed to the suggestion mode.

Further, in the present modification, the character image G2 of the ally character holding a stick is displayed as the character image acting on the specific hold display, but the character image displayed on the display device 41 is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate. It is possible, and for example, it may be the character image G1 of a teammate character holding a spear. Also, the way of moving the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the indication effect), the display mode of the specific hold display is changed to a display mode imitating an enemy character, and then the character image G2 is displayed on the specific hold display. Is operated (in the case of this modification, tapped with a stick), but is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may not change to a display mode imitating an enemy character.

FIG. 53 shows an example of a second type aura effect when the aura effect lottery is won and the action possibility lottery is won.

When the precursor effect starts, first, as shown in (C) of FIG. 53, the character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41. Next, as shown in (h) of FIG. 53, the character image G2 moves to the action position, and the rod is swung down so that the tip of the character image overlaps the specific reserved display. Next, in the case where the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game that is won in the lottery for the variation pending change effect, as shown in (F) of FIG. 53, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game which has been selected in the lottery for the variation pending change effect, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed as shown in (f) of FIG. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. Then, when the precursor effect is finished, the character image G2 exits from the operating position and disappears from the display unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, after the character image G2 acts on the specific hold display (after the bar returns to a state where it does not overlap the specific hold display), the display mode of the specific hold display changes to the suggestion mode. However, the timing at which the display mode of the specific hold display changes can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the display mode of the specific hold display may change to the suggestion mode while the character image G2 is acting on the specific hold display (when the bar overlaps with the specific hold display).

FIG. 54 shows an example of a second type of precursor effect when the precursor effect lottery is won and the action possibility lottery is lost.

When the precursor effect is started, first, as shown in (m) of FIG. 54, the character image G2 appears on the display unit of the display device 41. Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (Mi), the character image G2 disappears from the display unit without moving to the action position. Next, in the case where the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game that is won in the lottery for the variation pending change effect, as shown in (m) of FIG. 54, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed. Changes to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game which is selected in the lottery for the variation pending change effect, the display mode of the specific pending display is displayed as shown in FIG. Does not change to the suggestion mode, and the indication effect ends.

The length of the precursor effect execution time when the action possibility lottery is won and the length of the precursor effect execution time when the action possibility lottery is defeated may be the same or different. In the present modification, the length of the precursor effect execution time is, for example, the character image G2.
It is the length from the timing to start the display of to the timing to start the display in the suggestion mode of the specific hold display.

Further, when the character is not selected for the action possibility lottery, the display mode of the specific hold display does not change to the suggestion mode after the character image G2 disappears from the display unit, but the specific hold before the character image G2 disappears from the display unit. The display mode of the display may be changed to the suggestion mode. In this case, the timing at which the character image G2 disappears from the display unit may be the same or different depending on whether or not the action availability lottery is won.

In addition, during the sign production, in order to make it noticeable that the sign production is being executed, the background special image is darkened (blacked out), etc. You may let me. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

In addition, as the second type predictive effect, a predictive effect of whether or not the display mode of the variable pending display 643 displayed in the pending digestion area 640 changes to a suggestive mode, and the pending display unit 630 displays the predictive effect. Both the presentation effect of whether the display mode of the hold display 633 changes to the suggestion mode may be executable. Further, in this case, the length of the execution time of the predictive effect of whether or not the display mode of the changing pending display 643 displayed in the pending consumption area 640 changes and the pending display 633 displayed in the pending display unit 630. The length of the execution time of the precursor effect that determines whether or not the display mode changes may be the same or different. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

The timing to start displaying the character image G2 can be changed as appropriate, and the hold display 6
It is preferable to prohibit the display start of the character image G2 during the hold shift effect in which 33 is shifted to the adjacent side. That is, it is preferable that the display of the character image G2 be started before the hold shift effect or after the hold shift effect. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

Further, the number of times the display mode of the specific hold display changes during the sign presentation may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, you may perform the change number lottery which determines the number of times that the display mode of the specific hold display is changed. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

Further, the character image appearing during the sign presentation may be selected from a plurality of types of character images based on a predetermined condition. That is, a character lottery may be performed in which one character image is selected from a plurality of types of character images. The same applies to the first-type predictive presentation.

Further, the number of times the character image (or the movable accessory or the like) acts on the specific hold display during the sign presentation may be determined based on a predetermined condition. That is, the number-of-actions lottery may be performed to determine the number of times the character image (or movable accessory or the like) is applied to the specific hold display. First
The same applies to the type of aura production.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example in which change number lottery, character lottery, and action number lottery are combined and performed.

As described above, the effect control device 300 performs the action possibility lottery and the pending change changing effect lottery in order to determine the effect mode of the second type of omen effect. In addition to these lottery, by performing combination of change number lottery, character lottery, and action number lottery, the number of times the display mode of the specific hold display changes (or selection of the number of changes) depending on the type of the character image that appears. The ratio), the number of times the character image acts on the specific hold display (or the selection ratio of the number of times of acting), and the like can be made different.

In addition to the action availability lottery and the lottery for the changing pending change effect, when the combination of the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number drawing is performed, for example, when the lottery for the changing pending change effect is won Change number lottery to determine the number of times to change the display mode of the hold display,
Based on the result of the number of times of change lottery, a character lottery is performed to select one character image from a plurality of types of character images, and the character image is displayed with a specific hold based on the result of the number of times of change lottery and the result of the character lottery. The number-of-actions lottery is performed to determine the number of times (for example, the number of times the specific hold display is hit with a stick). In this case, the change number lottery, the character lottery, and the action number lottery are, for example, the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2) of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 41).
009).

FIG. 55A shows an example of the character lottery table. In the character lottery table, the probability that the character image A is selected and the character image B when the “holding change once” and the “holding change twice” are selected by the change number drawing The probability of being selected is specified.

Here, “once change of hold” means that the display mode of the specific hold display is changed once, that is, from the normal display mode (for example, blue circle) to the first suggestion mode (for example, green circle). Is to change to. “Twice pending change” means changing the display mode of the specific pending display twice, that is, changing from the normal display mode to the first suggestion mode, and then from the first suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode. It is to change to a mode (for example, a red circle).

FIG. 55B shows an example of the number-of-actions lottery table. In the action number lottery table, "character image A" is selected by the character lottery, and "character image A" is selected by the change number lottery.
When "Hold change 1 time" is selected, "Character image A" is selected by the character lottery, and "Hold change 2 times" is selected by the change number lottery, "Character image B" is selected by the character lottery. Is selected, and “1 change on hold” is selected by the change number lottery, and “character image B” is selected by the character lottery.
In addition, when "holding change 2 times" is selected by the change number lottery, "1 time action"
The probability of selecting and the probability of selecting "double action" are specified.

Here, the “single action” means that the character image acts on the specific reserved display once (for example, hitting the specific pending display once with a stick), and the “twice action” means the character image. Is to act on the specific hold display twice (for example, hitting the specific hold display twice with a stick).

For example, “1 change on hold” is selected by the change number lottery, and “
When "double action" is selected, the display mode of the specific pending display may be changed by the first action of the character image acting on the specific pending display twice or the double acting. The display mode of the specific hold display may be changed by the second action of.

In addition, “holding change 2 times” is selected by the change number lottery and “1 by the action number lottery”.
When “turning action” is selected, the first suggestive aspect may be changed to the second suggestive aspect, or the second suggestive aspect may be immediately changed to the second suggestive aspect. You may change into the suggestion mode of.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state for giving a game value to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of the starting condition and stores it as starting memory for the variable display game (game control device 100), and effect control means for executing effects related to the variable display game. (Production control device 300). The effect control means can display a predetermined image (character image G1) and a start memory display (holding display 633 or changing hold display 643) corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, and a predetermined notice effect ( As the indication effect, it is possible to execute a first pattern of notice effect in which a predetermined image acts on the starting memory display and a second pattern of notice effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the starting memory display.

In the case of the present embodiment, the first pattern of notice production is a second-type predictive production when the action availability lottery is won, and the second pattern of notice production is the second case when the action availability lottery is lost.
It is a precursor to the type.

Therefore, the character image G2 may or may not act on the hold display 633. Since the movement of the image (character image G2) that can act on the hold display 633 is not one pattern, the image that can act on the hold display 633 is not. The interest of the game can be raised by.

In the case of the present embodiment, the character image G2 is moved to the operating position and the starting memory display (
Two patterns are provided: a pattern that acts on the hold display 633 and the changing display 643) and a pattern that does not move the character image G2 to the working position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, in addition to these patterns, a pattern in which the character image G2 moves to the operating position but does not affect the starting memory display (the stick is not swung down) or the like may be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the start memory display (holding display 633 and changing hold display 64) in a predetermined notice effect (predictive effect).
It is possible to change the display mode of 3). The rate of changing the display mode of the starting memory display in the first pattern notice production can be set higher than the rate of changing the display mode of the start memory display in the second pattern notice production (FIG. 52(d). )-(G))
..

With this configuration, whether or not the sign effect is a sign effect in which the display mode of the start memory display is likely to change depending on the pattern of the sign effect (that is, the movement of the image that can act on the start memory display). Can be suggested. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation at the stage when the player can recognize that the indication effect of the starting memory display is likely to change due to the suggestion, and thus the interest of the game is improved. .. Further, not only in the final stage of whether or not the display mode of the starting memory display changes, but also in the middle stage of how the image (character image G2) that can act on the starting memory display moves. Since it is possible to attract the interest of, it is possible to execute a signage production with a high interest.

[Hold change effect]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the hold display section 630 as the hold change effect.
The pending change notice (holding change notice effect) that suggests the look-ahead result by changing the display mode of the pending display 633 displayed in FIG. 6 or the pending display 633 displayed in the pending consumption area 640 (changing pending display section). It is possible to execute the changing pending change effect that suggests the result or the changing pattern of the special figure changing display game being executed by changing the display mode of.

For example, when the movable accessory 671 is in a state of overlapping the front and rear display portions 630 and 640 (
That is, when the holding change effect is executed when the movable accessory 671 is positioned in front of the hold display section, it is visually confirmed that the display mode of the hold displays 633 and 643 is changed by the movable accessory 671. It may be impossible (difficult to see). However, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front-rear direction, that is, the state in which the display mode of the hold display is changed is invisible (difficult to see). ) Or not, when the execution timing of the hold change effect arrives, the hold change effect is started,
The display mode of the pending display of the change target is changed.

In (a) of FIG. 56, even if the movable accessory 671 overlaps the pending display 633 of the change target (here, the pending display 633 at the right end) in the front and back, the effect control device 300 causes the pending change effect (
In this case, the notice of pending change) is executed to change the display mode of the pending display 633 to be changed.

Of course, it is also possible to prohibit the execution of the pending change effect during the period in which the movable accessory 671 overlaps the pending display portions 630 and 640 in the front and back. However, in the case of such a configuration, due to a malfunction of the movable accessory 671, the movable accessory 671 does not overlap with the pending display section in the front and back while the movable accessory 671 overlaps with the pending display section. When an inconvenience occurs, the player cannot enjoy the accessory motion effect production or the hold change effect production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, execution of the pending change effect is performed regardless of whether or not the movable accessory 671 overlaps the hold display units 630 and 640 before and after, that is, regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671. When the timing comes, the hold change effect is started to change the display mode of the change target hold displays 633 and 643. Thereby, the movable accessory 671
Even if it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory motion effect due to the operation failure of (1), it is possible to prevent the change in the interest of the game because the hold change effect can be enjoyed.

Here, if the hold indications 633 and 643 are hidden by the movable accessory 671 and are invisible (difficult to see), there is a possibility that the accurate starting memory number cannot be grasped even if the indications on the hold indication portions 630 and 640 are viewed. However, in this embodiment, since the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are provided separately from the reserved display sections 630 and 640, the reserved display is invisible (difficult to see). Even if you do not know the exact starting memory number.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the pending change effect is executed regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671, while the pending change effect is being executed, the movable accessory 671 overlaps the pending display portions 630 and 640 in the front and back. It may change to a state where they do not overlap, and the movable accessory 671 is displayed on the hold display portion 63.
It may change from 0 or 640 to a state in which there is no overlap in the front and back.

FIG. 56B shows the size of the movable accessory 671 (the movable accessory 6 in the display section of the display device 41).
This is an example of executing the hold change effect in a region wider than the size of 71 viewed from the front).
Specifically, the movable accessory 6 is viewed from the front as an effect image that enhances the effect of the hold change effect.
An image (effect image E or the like) having a size protruding from 71 may be displayed.

As a result, the movable accessory 671 is in a state of overlapping with the hold display units 630 and 640 in the front and rear, and is related to the hold change effect (the change target hold displays 633 and 643 and the hold display 633.
, 643 related to the change of the display mode (such as the effect image E) is not hidden by the movable accessory, the player can recognize that the pending change effect is being executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56, although only a part of the change target holding displays 633 and 643 are hidden by the movable accessory 671 and invisible (difficult to view), the change target holding displays 633 and 63 are not visible.
All 43 may be hidden by the movable accessory 671 so as to be invisible (difficult to see).

Further, a character image (a predetermined character image associated with the pending change effect) is displayed as an effect image for enhancing the effect effect of the pending change effect, and the character image is reserved display 633 regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671. You may perform the effect which acts on 643.

Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be longer than the execution time of the hold change effect,
May be short. Further, the operation time of the movable accessory 671 may be the same as the execution time of the hold change effect.

Further, instead of the movable accessory 671, a character image that can be superimposed and displayed may be displayed on the hold display sections 630 and 640. In this case, the character image may be displayed in front of the hold displays 633 and 643 or may be displayed in the back side of the hold displays 633 and 643.

When the character image is displayed on the front side of the hold displays 633 and 643, when the character image and the hold displays 633 and 643 overlap each other, the hold display 633 is displayed as the character image.
A portion of 643 that overlaps the character image is hidden. On the other hand, when the character image is displayed on the back side of the hold displays 633 and 643, when the character image and the hold displays 633 and 643 overlap, the hold displays 633 and 643 display the hold display among the character images. The portions overlapping with 633 and 643 will be hidden.

In addition, the movable accessory 671 is made of a transparent or semi-transparent member, and the display of the hold display 633 is changing and the display related to the hold change effect can be visually recognized through the movable accessory 671. It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, the movable accessory 671 may be provided with a hole or a gap, and the state in which the display modes of the hold displays 633 and 643 are changed or the display related to the hold change effect may be visually recognized from the hole or the gap. Good.

FIG. 57 shows a movable accessory 672 that can be divided into a plurality of parts as a movable accessory that can be in a state of overlapping with the hold display portions 630 and 640. The movable accessory 672 is converted from a first state (a state where no crack is formed) between the parts (a state where no crack is formed) to a second state (a crack completed state) where a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts. It may be possible.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58, the execution period of the pending change effect preferably overlaps at least part of the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in the crack completed state. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the pending display is started from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672 (that is, the gap formed during the period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not cracked). A state in which the display modes of 633 and 643 are changing and a display related to the pending change effect can be visually recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the start timing of the pending change effect is set to coincide with the timing (t21) at which the conversion operation of the movable accessory 672 to the crack completion state is started, but the pending change effect of the pending change effect is set. The start timing can be changed as appropriate, and is preferably set within a period (t21 to t25) in which the movable accessory 672 is not cracked.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58, the end timing of the pending change effect is set within the period (t22 to t24) in which the movable accessory 672 is in the crack completed state, but the ending timing of the pending change effect is appropriately set. It is changeable and the period during which the movable accessory 672 is not cracked (t21
Up to t25) is preferable.

Further, when the movable accessory which can be overlapped with the hold display portions 630 and 640 in the front and back is the movable accessory 672 which can be converted into the uncracked state and the crack completed state, the movable accessory 672 is opened and closed ( The position to perform the conversion operation to the crack complete state, the return operation to return to the uncracked state)
It may be determined based on the positions of the pending displays 633 and 643 of the change target.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, of the three hold displays 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633 at the right end is easier to visually recognize when the movable accessory 672 is in the crack completed state, and the middle hold display is displayed. 633 is easier to visually recognize when the movable accessory 672 is not cracked.

Therefore, for example, the position where the movable accessory 672 performs the opening/closing operation is changed to the pending display 633 of the change target.
By setting the position so as to overlap with the front and rear, the holding display 6 can be performed through the gap formed in the movable accessory 672.
It is possible to visually recognize how the display mode of 33 is changing.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is When a special result is obtained, a special game state for giving a game value to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of the starting condition and stores it as a starting memory of the variable display game (game control device 100), and a starting memory display (holding display 633, corresponding to the starting memory). 643) is displayed on the display section of the display device 41 in the start memory display area (holding display section 630, hold exhaustion area 640).
0), a state of being positioned in front of the start memory display area (a state of overlapping front and rear), and a state of being retracted from the front of the start memory display area (a state of not overlapping front and rear) 671
And The starting memory display control means can execute a starting memory display change effect (holding change effect) that changes the display mode of the starting memory display regardless of the state of the movable accessory 671.

Therefore, even if a malfunction of the movable accessory occurs and it becomes impossible to enjoy the accessory action effect, the hold change effect can be enjoyed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced by the hold change effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. When it becomes, the special game state which gives the game value to the player occurs. The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of the starting condition and stores it as a starting memory of the variable display game (game control device 100), and a starting memory display area provided on the display unit of the display device 41. Movable so that it can be converted into a state of being positioned in front of the (holding display unit 630 and the holding digestion area 640) (a state of overlapping front and back) and a state of being retracted from the front of the starting memory display region (a state of not overlapping front and back). The accessory 671 and a display control unit (production control device 300) that controls the display content displayed on the display unit are provided. The display control means displays a start memory display (holding displays 633 and 643) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area, changes the display mode of the start memory display in the area of a predetermined size in the display unit, and It is possible to execute a start memory display change effect (holding change effect) that displays an image (effect image E or the like) related to the change, and the predetermined size becomes larger than the size of the movable accessory 671 when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 56(b)).

Therefore, even if the movable accessory 671 is positioned in front of the pending display portions 630 and 640, at least a part of the display related to the pending change effect is not hidden by the movable accessory, so that the game is changed by the pending change effect. The interest can be increased.

The predetermined size may be smaller than the display unit of the display device 41 or may be the same size as the display unit of the display device 41.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. When it becomes, the special game state which gives the game value to the player occurs. The gaming machine 10 extracts a predetermined random number based on the satisfaction of the starting condition and stores it as the starting memory of the variable display game (game control device 100), and the starting memory display (holding display 633) corresponding to the starting memory. Is displayed in the starting memory display area (holding display section 630, holding exhaustion area 640) provided on the display unit of the display device 41, and is located in front of the starting memory display area. A movable accessory 672 that can be converted into a state (a state in which the front and rear overlap) and a state in which the starting memory display area is retracted from the front (a state in which the front and rear do not overlap) are provided.
The movable accessory 672 can be divided into a plurality of parts (portions), and a gap having a predetermined width is formed between the parts from a first state (a state where the gap is not formed) between the parts. It is possible to convert to the second state (completed cracking state). The starting memory display control means can execute a starting memory display change effect (holding change effect) that changes the display mode of the starting memory display, and the movable accessory is in the execution period (t21 to t23) of the starting memory display change effect. 672 can be configured to overlap at least part of the period (t22 to t24) in the second state (see FIG. 58).

Therefore, even when the movable accessory 672 is positioned in front of the pending display portions 630 and 640, the display mode of the pending display 633 changes from the gap formed in the movable accessory 672, and the like. Since the display related to the pending change effect can be visually recognized, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the pending change effect.

[Pre-reading effect when the hold number command is abnormal (when the hold number is abnormal)]
59 to 60 show the results of control by the above-mentioned special figure 1 pending information setting processing (FIG. 36A), special figure 2 pending information setting processing (FIG. 36B), and prefetching variable system command processing (FIG. 38). It is a screen figure.

FIG. 59A is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the prefetch effect is stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command when the hold occurs.

FIG. 59A (A) shows a situation in which the special figure variable display game is being executed in the variable display area 610. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), and there are three special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and the special figure 1 hold number is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 shows the number 4, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 showing the special figure 2 reserved number shows the number 3, and a total of seven reserved displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold displays 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), the hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, and the effect control device 30
When 0 is received from the game control device 100 (A2907), which is a normal decoration special figure 2 hold number command (when the result of B1701 is "N"), prefetch effect (preliminary effect) is set as shown in FIG. 59A (I). Is executed. The look-ahead effect when the hold is generated is, for example, drawn and set in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable system command processing (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59A (i), a total of eight hold displays 633 are displayed, and a hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 2 hold is displayed at the right end. As a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 2 hold, a hold change notice is executed, and the hold display 633a at the right end changes from a normal display mode to a suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed in the above-described manner of FIGS. 56 and 57.

In addition, in FIG. 59A (I), a character image 635 "intensity in hold" is displayed as a look-ahead effect for the generated special map 2 hold. Further, although it is not a pre-reading effect, a predetermined display 636 "Hold MAX" indicating that the total number of holdings has reached the upper limit of 8 (the number of holdings of special figure 1 holding and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 each have reached upper limit 4) Is displayed as an effect.

In the situation of FIG. 59A (A), even if the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) occurs, the effect control device 300 receives the abnormal special figure 2 hold number command (A2907) and receives the special figure. When the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the 2 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4 (when the result of B1701 is “Y” and the result of B1702 is “N”), the look-ahead effect ( Notice production) is not executed (not set). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the prefetching effect even if the number of holdings exceeds the upper limit.

In FIG. 59A(U), the pending change notice as the prefetch effect for the generated special map 2 suspension is not executed. Note that the hold display 633a itself at the right end with respect to the generated special figure 2 hold does not have to be displayed, but increases according to the special figure 2 hold number (here, 5) obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command. The hold display that is not related to prefetching may be displayed for the number of hold times (here, 2) (indicated by a dotted line). It should be noted that an advance change notice as a look-ahead effect is not executed for the increased number of hold displays (here, 2) including the hold display for the generated special figure 2 hold.

In addition, in FIG. 59A (U), the character image 635 “intensity in hold” as the look-ahead effect for the generated special map 2 hold is not displayed. Furthermore, in order to indicate that the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is abnormal, the special figure 2 hold number (here, 5) (5 in this case) obtained from the abnormal figure 2 hold number display section 660 is abnormal. A value that is usually impossible and exceeds the upper limit of 4 is displayed as an error in a special display mode (there is a circle). As a result, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 2 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, it is possible to configure so that the special figure 2 hold number is not displayed in order to prevent confusion of the player. is there.

Note that FIG. 59A shows the case where the special figure 2 hold occurs, but the same applies when the special figure 1 hold occurs.

FIG. 59B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the prefetch effect is not stopped when the hold number command when the hold occurs is abnormal.

FIG. 59B (e) shows a situation where the special figure variable display game is being executed in the variable display area 610, as in the case of FIG. 59 (a). There is one special figure 1 hold, there is one special figure 2 hold, and the number 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 that displays the special figure 1 hold number. The number 1 is displayed on the number-of-holds display section 660, and a total of two holding displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (e), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) occurs, and effect control device 30
When 0 is received from the game control device 100 (A2907), which is a normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command (when the result of B1701 is "N"), prefetch effect (preliminary effect) is set as shown in FIG. 59B (o). Is executed. The look-ahead effect when the hold is generated is, for example, drawn and set in step B1713 of the look-ahead variable system command processing (FIG. 38).

In FIG. 59B (o), a total of three hold displays 633 are displayed, and a hold display 633a corresponding to the generated special figure 1 hold is displayed at the right end. As a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, a hold change notice (a look-ahead notice effect) is executed, and the hold display 633a at the right end changes from a normal display mode to a suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The notice of pending change is shown in FIG.
57 may be performed in the mode of FIG. Further, as a look-ahead effect for the generated special figure 1 hold, a character image 635 "intensity in hold" is displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 59B (e), special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) occurs, and effect control device 30
0 receives an abnormal decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (A2907), the special figure 1 reservation number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command is the upper limit number 4 or less (the result of B1701 is “Y "
Moreover, when the result of B1702 is "Y"), the prefetch effect (notice effect) is executed (set) as shown in FIG. 59B (or). Therefore, the prefetch effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command, except for a special situation where the hold number exceeds the upper limit number. Then, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the prefetching effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In FIG. 59B (or), the character image 635 as the pre-reading effect for the generated special map 1 hold.
"Hot heat in hold" is displayed. It should be noted that a hold display not related to prefetching may be displayed for the number of holdings (here, 2) increased corresponding to the number of holdings for special drawing 1 (here, 3) acquired from the abnormal decoration special drawing 1 holding number command. (Shown by the dotted line). Then, the pending change notice as the prefetch effect for the pending display of the increased number of holdings (here, 2) including the pending display for the generated special figure 1 holding is not executed. However, in another example, if the special figure 1 pending number command acquired from the decorative special figure 1 pending number command is the upper limit number 4 or less even if the decorative special figure 1 pending number command is abnormal, the increased pending number (here, 2) The hold display may be performed as usual (similar to the hold display of the solid line), and a hold change notice for the increased hold display (particularly, the hold display for the special Fig. 1 hold occurring this time) may be executed.

Further, in FIG. 59B (or), if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, the decoration special figure 1
Even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the hold number command is less than or equal to the upper limit number 4, the hold change notice for the increased hold display has not been executed, but it has already been started and executed before the reception of this decorative special figure 1 hold number command. The pending change notice may be continued regardless of an error in the pending number command.

In FIG. 59B (or), even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is the upper limit number 4 or less, it is regarded as a normal command, and the special figure 1
The number of holdings (here, 3) may be displayed. In order to indicate that there is an error in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold number (3 in this case) acquired from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display section 650. An error may be displayed in a special display mode (there is a circle). Also, if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, even if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is the upper limit number 4 or less, the configuration that the special figure 1 hold number is not displayed is also possible. Is.

Note that FIG. 59B shows the situation where the special figure 1 hold is generated, but the same is true when the special figure 2 hold is generated.

FIG. 60 is a modification example of FIG. 59A. FIG. 60(A)(I) shows FIG. 59A(A)(
I) is the same. However, in FIG. 60 (u'), when the effect control device 300 receives the abnormal decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A2907) and the special figure 2 reservation number exceeds the upper limit number 4 (B17).
When the result of 01 is “Y” and the result of B1702 is “N”), not only the pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 2 suspension is not executed, but also the pre-reading effect already started and executed (the pre-reading effect currently being executed). ) May be terminated (B1717). For example, in FIG. 60A, the pending change notice may be ended with respect to the pending display 633e (shown by diagonal lines) for which the pending change notice has already been executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading effect that is being executed from being continued and confusing the player despite the abnormal state in which the number of holdings exceeds the upper limit. It should be noted that the suggestion effect (effect indicating the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed) by the variation pending display 643 (digesting pending display) in the pending digestion area 640 may be continued or terminated. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 60 (u'), in order to prevent the player from being excessively discouraged, a part of the pre-reading effect already started (the pre-reading effect currently being executed) is ended, Other parts may continue. For example, although the notice of the pending change is ended, the continuous notice effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be continued.

59 to 60, the effect control device 300 may determine whether or not to execute the prefetch effect in accordance with the game state and the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the pending hold. .. For example, in the normal electric power support state, a prize is frequently given to the second start winning a prize mouth of the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, when the hold number command is abnormal and the hold number is less than or equal to the upper limit number, the special figure 2 is generated. The pre-reading effect for the hold may be prohibited, and only the pre-reading effect for the generated special figure 1 hold may be executed (for FIG. 59B (or)). For example, in the Hoden support state, if the hold number command is abnormal and the hold number exceeds the upper limit number, the prefetch effect for the hold occurred at that time is not executed, but the expectation of the player for the Hoden support state is The pre-reading effect that has already been started and executed (the pre-reading effect that is currently being executed) may be continued in order to maintain it (with respect to FIG. 60(u')).

59 to 60 show the situation where an error occurs in the hold number command (A2907) when the hold occurs, but as will be described below, the hold number command (A33 at the time of hold shift).
04, A3307) also occurs in a situation where an abnormality occurs.

FIG. 61A is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the prefetching effect is stopped when the hold number command (A3304, A3307) at the time of the hold shift is abnormal.

FIG. 61A(sa) shows a situation in which the special symbol 2 variable display game ends and a stop symbol is displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615. There are four special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory, first start memory), and there are three special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory), and the special figure 1 hold number is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 shows the number 4, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 showing the special figure 2 reserved number shows the number 3, and a total of seven reserved displays 633 are displayed. For one of the hold displays 633 (indicated by diagonal lines), the hold change notice in the suggestion mode is executed. In the pending digest area 640, the changing pending display 643 is hidden.

In the situation of FIG. 61A (sa), a holding shift (holding shift effect) in which the holding display 633 is shifted to the adjacent side is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game starts. In this case, the game control device 100 sends a decoration special figure 1 hold number command to the effect control device 300 (A3304).
.. When the effect control device 300 receives the normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG. 61A (shi)
The look-ahead effect (notice effect) is executed as described above. Look-ahead effect at the time of holding shift, for example,
In step B1713 of the prefetching variable system command processing (FIG. 38), the lottery is preliminarily selected and set, and is executed at the time of the holding shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61A (), a total of 6 hold displays 633 are displayed, and the hold display 633a at the right end is displayed.
On the other hand, a pending change notice (pre-reading notice effect) is executed as the pre-reading effect at the time of the holding shift, and the normal display mode is changed to the suggesting mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46 to 47, etc.). The precursor effect can be set, for example, in advance notice lottery (B2006 or B2009) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41).

In addition, in FIG. 61A (shi), the character image 635 "intensity in hold" is displayed as a prefetch effect at the time of hold shift for any hold.

In the situation of FIG. 61A, the effect control device 300 has an abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A
3304) is received and the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, as shown in FIG. 61A (su), the prefetch effect (notice effect) at the time of the hold shift is executed. Not done (prohibited in B2015 etc.) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the prefetching effect even if the number of holdings exceeds the upper limit. Note that in FIG. 61A (s), the prefetching effect that has already been started and executed (the prefetching effect that is currently being executed) may be terminated, as in FIG.

In FIG. 61A(s), the notice of the pending change as the prefetch effect at the time of the pending shift is not executed. Further, the hold display not related to the prefetch may be displayed by the hold number (here, 3) increased corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (here, 6) obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (Shown by the dotted line). It should be noted that the notice of hold change as the prefetch effect for the hold display for the increased hold number (here, 3) is not executed.

In addition, in FIG. 61A (), the character image 635 “intensity in hold” as the prefetch effect at the time of the hold shift is not displayed. Furthermore, in order to show that the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, the special figure 1 hold number (here, 6) (6 here) obtained from the abnormal decoration special figure 1 hold number display section 650 is abnormal. A value that is usually impossible and exceeds the upper limit of 4 is displayed as an error in a special display mode (there is a circle). As a result, the player can recognize that the hold number command is abnormal by looking at the error display. In addition, when the special figure 1 pending number acquired from the abnormal decorative special figure 1 pending number command exceeds the upper limit number 4, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the special figure 1 pending number. is there.

Although FIG. 61A shows a situation in which an abnormality occurs in the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, the same is true when an abnormality occurs in the decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

FIG. 61B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the prefetch effect is not stopped when there is an abnormality in the hold number command when the hold occurs.

In FIG. 61B (se), as in FIG. 61A (sa), the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop symbol is displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615. Tokushu 1 Hold 1
There is one special figure 2 hold, and the number 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 that displays the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display section 660 that displays the special figure 2 hold number. The number 1 is shown, and a total of two hold displays 633 are displayed.

In the situation of FIG. 61B (se), a holding shift (holding shift effect) in which the holding display 633 is shifted to the adjacent side is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A3304) to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the normal decoration special figure 1 hold number command, FIG. 61B (so)
As described above, the prefetch effect (preliminary effect) at the time of the hold shift is executed. The prefetching effect at the time of the holding shift is, for example, a lottery in advance in step B1713 of the prefetching variable system command processing (FIG. 38).
It is set and executed at the time of holding shift (B2015).

In FIG. 61B (so), one reservation display 633 is displayed in total, and the reservation display 633a at the right end is displayed.
On the other hand, the notice of the change of the hold during the hold shift is executed, and the normal display mode is changed to the suggestion mode (shown in black in the figure). The pending change notice may be executed with the above-mentioned precursor effect (FIGS. 46 to 47, etc.).

Further, in FIG. 61B (S), the prefetching effect at the time of the holding shift is executed for the holding display 633a at the right end by displaying the character image 635 "intensity in holding".

In the situation of FIG. 61B (se), even when the effect control device 300 receives an abnormal Toku-zu 1 hold number command (A3304) when the hold shift (hold shift effect) is executed, the Toku-zu 1 hold number is received. Since the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the command is less than or equal to the upper limit number 4, the prefetch effect (preliminary effect) at the time of the hold shift is executed as shown in FIG. 61B (ta). Therefore, the prefetch effect is executed even if there is an abnormality in the hold number command, except for a special situation where the hold number exceeds the upper limit number. Then, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution frequency of the prefetching effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In FIG. 61B (ta), the character image 635 “intensity in hold” as the prefetch effect for the hold display 633a at the right end is displayed during the hold shift. Further, a hold change notice as a look-ahead effect for the hold display 633a at the right end is executed. It should be noted that the number of holdings increased (here, 3) corresponding to the number of holdings of special drawing 1 (here, 3) acquired from the abnormal special drawing 1 holding number command.
However, a hold display irrelevant to prefetch may be performed (indicated by a dotted line). However, in another example, even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is the upper limit number 4 or less, the increased hold number (here, 3) The hold display of may be performed normally (similar to the hold display of the solid line).

In FIG. 61B (ta), even if the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 hold number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is the upper limit number 4 or less, it is regarded as a normal command, and the special figure 1
The number of holdings (here, 3) may be displayed. In order to indicate that the decoration special figure 1 hold number command is abnormal, the special figure 1 hold number (here, 3) acquired from the abnormal special figure 1 hold number display section 650 is special. An error is displayed in a different display mode (there is a circle). Even if the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command is abnormal, if the special figure 1 reservation number acquired from the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command is less than or equal to the upper limit number 4, the special figure 1 reservation number may not be displayed.

Although FIG. 61B shows the case where an abnormality occurs in the decorative special figure 1 reserved number command, the same is true when an abnormality occurs in the decorative special figure 2 reserved number command.

59 to 61 described above, the effect control device 300, the game control device 10
Depending on the setting information regarding the game condition acquired from the setting information command transmitted from 0, it may be determined whether or not the prefetching effect is executed. By doing so, the player has the pleasure of being able to infer the setting based on the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the interest in the game is improved. For example, in FIG.
9A (U) and FIG. 61A (S), pre-reading effect is executed in setting 3 (high setting), and setting 1 (
In the low setting) and the setting 2 (intermediate setting), the prefetch effect may not be executed. Also, for example, in FIG. 59B (or) and FIG. 61B (ta), pre-reading effect is not executed in setting 3 (high setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting), and pre-reading effect is executed in setting 1 (low setting). You may do it. Similarly, in FIG. 59A (I), FIG. 59B (O), FIG. 61A (SH), and FIG. 61B (SO), pre-reading effect (for example, character image 63) is set in setting 3 (high setting) and setting 2 (intermediate setting).
5 "Display of intense heat within hold") is performed, and pre-reading effect (for example, display of character image 635 "heat intense within hold") may not be executed in setting 1 (low setting).

Further, in FIGS. 59 to 61, it is also possible to change the upper limit number of holding numbers to a predetermined number. For example, even if the number-of-holds command is abnormal, if the number-of-holds acquired from the number-of-holds command is less than or equal to a predetermined number, the prefetch effect is executed, and if the number of holdings exceeds the predetermined number, the prefetch effect is not executed. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the frequency of performing the look-ahead effect decreases.
It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

[Modification]
The following configuration may be adopted as a modification of the first embodiment described above.

When the number of starting memory (holding number) indicated by the hold number command exceeds the upper limit (here, 4),
It is not necessary to execute the prefetch effect (preliminary effect) based on the prefetch variation system command (that is, the determination result of the predetermination), assuming that the hold number command is abnormal. On the other hand, when the number of starting storages indicated by the hold number command is equal to or less than the upper limit number (here, 4), the hold number command may be regarded as normal, and the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variable system command may be executed. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 may be omitted, the prefetch effect can be set when the result of step B1702 is “Y”, and the prefetch effect may not be set when the result of step B1702 is “N”. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the frequency of performing the prefetching effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, when the number of starting memories (reserved number) indicated by the reserved number command is less than the lower limit number (here, 1), the reserved number command is considered to be abnormal, and the prefetch variation system command (that is, the determination result of the preliminary determination). It is not necessary to execute the look-ahead effect (preliminary effect) based on. On the other hand, when the number of starting memories indicated by the hold number command is equal to or more than the lower limit number (here, 1), the hold number command may be regarded as normal, and the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variable system command may be executable. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, it is determined whether or not the starting storage number (holding number) indicated by the holding number command is the lower limit number or more. Then, Step B170
When the result of 2 is "Y", the prefetch effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is "N".
In this case, the prefetch effect may not be set. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the frequency of performing the prefetching effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, if the number of starting storages (holding number) indicated by the holding number command is less than the lower limit number (here 1) or exceeds the upper limit number (here 4), the holding number command is considered to be abnormal, It is not necessary to execute the look-ahead effect (notice effect) based on the look-ahead variable system command. On the other hand, if the number of starting memories indicated by the hold number command is equal to or more than the lower limit number and equal to or less than the upper limit number (in the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value (1 to 4)), the hold number command is normal. Considering that, the prefetch effect based on the prefetch variation system command may be executable. For example, in FIG. 38, step B1701 is omitted, and in step B1702, the number of starting storages indicated by the hold number command (
It is determined whether the (holding number) is greater than or equal to the lower limit and less than or equal to the upper limit. And step B17
If the result of 02 is "Y", the prefetch effect can be set, and the result of step B1702 is "
In the case of "N", the prefetch effect may not be set. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the frequency of performing the prefetching effect is reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a game control means (gaming control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition (starting winning area winning or the like), Effect control means (effect control device 3) capable of executing effects related to the variable display game
00), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store up to a predetermined upper limit of start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the satisfaction of the start condition. The pre-determination means (for example, the special figure holding information determination processing of the game control device 100) executes the variable display game execution information based on the starting memory stored by the starting storage means by executing the variable display game based on the starting memory. Also judge before. The game control means, starting storage number information (holding number command) indicating the starting storage number (holding number) stored by the starting storage means.
Can be transmitted to the effect control means.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the advance notice effect based on the determination result of the advance determination means (
Pre-reading effect) can be executed. When the received start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal, the effect control means (effect control device 300), if the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit number, the notice effect ( While the prefetch effect) is not executed, if the number of starting memories indicated by the number of starting memories information is equal to or less than the upper limit number, the notice effect (prefetch effect) can be executed. For example, when the number of starting memories indicated by the starting memory number information (holding number command) is increased or decreased by 2 or more at a time,
When the production control unit (production control device 300) receives only the determination result of the pre-determination unit but does not receive the startup storage number information (holding number command), the received startup storage number information (holding number command) is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Missing start memory number information (held number command) may cause such an abnormality.

In this way, the effect control means (effect control device 300) does not advance if the number of starting memories indicated by the starting memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number even if the received starting memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal. It is possible to execute a notice effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the execution frequency of the prefetching effect decreases due to an abnormality in the number-of-holds command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Note that if the configuration is such that the notice effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means is not always executed when the start memory number information (hold number command) is abnormal, the execution frequency of the prefetch effect is reduced.

On the other hand, if the received start memory number information (holding number command) is abnormal, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the start memory number indicated by the start memory number information exceeds the upper limit number.
The notice effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of the advance determination means is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing the look-ahead effect even if the number of stored memories exceeds the upper limit.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300),
If there is no abnormality in the received starting memory number information, or if the number of starting memories indicated by the starting memory number information is equal to or less than the upper limit number even if there is an abnormality in the received starting memory number information, a notice effect (prefetch effect) ) Can be performed. The production control means receives the start memory number information (hold number command)
If the number of starting memories indicated by the starting memory number information exceeds the upper limit when there is an abnormality in, the notice effect (pre-reading effect) already executed before receiving the starting memory number information is stopped. Good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prefetching effect that is being executed from being continued and confusing the player despite the abnormal state in which the number of stored memories exceeds the upper limit.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes setting changing means (setting changing device 43) capable of changing the setting relating to the game condition, and the notice effect (prefetch effect) can be executed according to the setting by the setting changing means. Is. Therefore, the player has the pleasure of being able to infer the setting based on the execution of the notice effect (prefetch effect), and the interest in the game is improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66A. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

[Timing chart for decorative special designs and decorative reduced designs]
62, in the second embodiment, a hold display 633 (special view hold display), decoration special design (identification information, decoration first design, large design) and decoration reduced design (identification information, decoration second design, small) Fig. 3) is a timing chart showing a change in display mode over time.

As shown in the screen transition diagram described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A, the decoration special symbol includes a plurality of variable display regions 610 (left region 610A, right region 610B, provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41). Each is displayed in a plurality of columns in the middle area 610C). Specifically, in each variable display area 610, the decoration 1st symbol A (left large symbol, first special symbol) in the left region 610A
However, in the right area 610B, the decoration first symbol B (right large symbol, second special symbol), the middle region 610C
Decorative 1st design C (medium and large design, 3rd special design) is enlarged (main display, normal display)
And displayed in a variable manner.

The decoration reduced design is a special design smaller than the decoration special design, and in the variable display area 615 provided on the right side of the display screen of the display device 41, as shown in a screen transition diagram described later with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66A. , Variable display (reduced display) so that three lines are lined up and down. Specifically, in the variable display area 615, the decoration reduced design arranged above is the decoration second design A (small upper design), and the decoration reduced design arranged below is the decoration second design B (lower small). The pattern is a pattern), and the decorative reduced pattern to be arranged therein is the decorative second pattern C (small and medium patterns).

The aspect of the variable display of the decorative special symbol and the decorative reduced symbol is set in step B2017 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 41) executed by the effect control device 300, for example.

Returning to FIG. 62, description of the hold display 633 and the timing chart of the decorative special symbol and the ornament reduced symbol will be continued. From time t0 to time t3 in FIG. 62, in a normal game state (normal state) in which no special game state (specific game state or special game state) has occurred, the sum of the number of special map 1 hold and the number of special map 2 hold Is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation when the number of holdings (the number of starting memories, the number of special figure holdings) does not reach the upper limit (for example, 8). In addition, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the time t0 to the time t3 may be set to be the timing from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop in the case where there is no reservation number.

At time t0, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C start to change. At time t0, the decoration first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode (normal variation, normal variation pattern) in which the decoration special symbol is scrolled up and down one after another. The decoration second designs A to C are variably displayed in a changing mode in which the displayed decoration reduced design is changed so as to be sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling to the next decoration reduced design.

At time t1, the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped (variably stopped) as a substantially stopped state in which it is not fixed,
At time t2, the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in a substantially stopped state in which it is not fixed.

When the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped at the time t1, for example, the decoration first symbol A becomes swing fluctuation in which the temporarily stopped symbol swings with a slight swing width. In addition, the decoration 1 which is scrolled before and after (up and down) the decoration 1st design A that is temporarily stopped and is displayed in the same row as the decoration 1st design A
The symbol (±1 symbol) before or after the symbol A is hidden. The design (±1 design) before or after the first decorative design A is displayed in the same row as the first decorative design A in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). -See Figure 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction for the decorative first symbol A.

When the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped at the time t2, similarly, the decoration first symbol B becomes swing fluctuation. In addition, the first decorative pattern B is scrolled before and after the temporarily stopped decorative first pattern B.
The symbol (±1 symbol) before or after the decorative first symbol B displayed in the same row as is hidden. The design (±1 design) before or after the first decorative design B is displayed in the same row as the first decorative design B in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). -See Figure 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction for the decorative first symbol B. In addition,
The decoration first design C that is not temporarily stopped is continuously displayed in a variable manner together with the decoration second designs A to C (decorated decoration design).

At time t3, the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbols A to C are finally stopped (variably stopped) as a stopped state. At time t3, the decoration first design A and the decoration first design B are
The temporarily stopped design becomes the design that is permanently stopped. Further, when the decoration first symbol C and the decoration second symbols A to C are permanently stopped, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a fixed stop symbol of the special figure variable display game. At that time, the symbols that are scrolled before and after the decorative first symbol C and displayed are hidden. The pattern (±1 pattern) before or after the first decorative design C is displayed in the same row as the first decorative design C in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen (FIG. 63). -See Figure 66A). One direction in the display screen corresponds to the variable display direction for the decorative first pattern C.

Next, from time t4 to time t5, the number of holdings is the upper limit number (eg, 8) in the normal gaming state.
Is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. In addition, in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the time t4 to the time t5 may be set to be the timing from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop when the number of holdings is one or more.

At time t4, the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbols A to C each start to change with a shortened change that changes in a time shorter than the normal change. At time t4, the first decorative pattern A to C
When variably displayed, the symbols (±1 symbol) before and after one of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed. The decoration second designs A to C are variably displayed in such a changing manner that the decoration reduced design is sequentially switched to the next decoration reduced design on the spot.

At time t5, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C are stopped. In the shortening variation, not only the decoration first design C and the decoration second design A to C but also the decoration first design A and B are time t.
The variable display is performed without temporary stop until the main stop at 5. After that, at time t5, when the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbols A to C are permanently stopped, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a stop symbol determined as a result mode of the special figure variation display game. At that time, the first decoration
The ±1 symbols scrolled before and after symbols A to C are hidden.

From time t6 to time t9, the normal reach variation (N reach variation) in the normal gaming state
This is the timing from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation in the reach state. In addition,
Even in the time saving state and the probability changing state, the time t6 to the time t9 can be set so as to have the same timing as in the case of the reach state which is the N reach variation of the normal gaming state.

At time t6, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbols A to C each start changing in a change pattern that is N reach change. At time t6, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed, ±1 symbols before and after the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed, and the decorative second symbols A to C are reduced in size. The symbols are variably displayed in a variably changing manner on the spot without scrolling.

At time t7, the ±1 symbols scrolling before and after the ornament first symbol A in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen are hidden, and then the ornament first symbol A is temporarily stopped.

At time t8, the ±1 symbols that are scrolled before and after the decorative first symbol B in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen are hidden, and then the decorative first symbol B is the decorative first symbol A. It becomes the same decoration special pattern as the above and is temporarily stopped, and it becomes the reach state.

At time t9, the symbols scrolling before and after the decoration first symbol C in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) in the display screen are hidden, and thereafter, the decoration first symbol C and the decoration second symbol A
~C is stopped. Further, the decoration first symbols A and B which have been temporarily stopped are also stopped.

[Example of screen transition when the number of pending calls has not reached the upper limit]
FIG. 63 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and the total number of reservations, which is the sum of the number of special map 1 reservations and the number of special map 2 reservations in the normal gaming state. (
It is an example of a screen transition of the entire game when the number of starting memories and the number of special figure reservations have not reached the upper limit number (for example, 8). When each of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number reaches its respective upper limit number (for example, 4), the total reserved number also reaches the upper limit number (for example, 8).

63A is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decorative pattern A is placed on the right area 610B in the left area 610A. The decoration first design B is enlarged and displayed in the middle area 610C, and the decoration first design C is variably displayed in a normal variation mode. Similarly, in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C, special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbol) are variably displayed (reduced display). It The decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen is also the variable display area 61 at the right end of the display screen.
The decorative reduced symbols (decorative second symbols A to C) displayed in 5 are also variable displays performed by the same special figure variable display game, and normally the stop symbols are the same, but even if they are different stop symbols. Good.

In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode, the variably displayed decorative first symbols A to C are indicated by "↓".

At the upper left corner of the display screen, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 displays the number "1" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number, which is the number of the first starting memory (special figure 1 reserved), and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660. , The number "1" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations, which is the number of the second starting memory (special figure 2 reservation), is displayed. In addition,
The first starting memory and the second starting memory are alternately stored with an upper limit of 4 (up to a total of 8), and the old starting memories are sequentially consumed. Further, in FIG. 63(S), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first starting memory which was the oldest starting memory.

On the hold display portion 630 displayed at the lower center of the display screen, a hold display 633 (special figure hold display) indicating the undigested first start memory or second start memory is displayed. On the hold display unit 630, a hold display 633 indicating the first start memory and a hold display 633 indicating the second start memory are alternately displayed, and up to eight hold displays 633 can be displayed at the maximum. In FIG. 63(S), two hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630.

Further, next to the hold display section 630 in the lower center of the display screen, a hold exhaustion area 640 (specific display section, changing hold display area) is displayed. A pedestal is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. On the pedestal of the reserved digestion area 640, a special map change pending display (special figure digestion pending display) corresponding to the special map variation display game being executed (being digested) is displayed.

FIG. 63 () shows the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the temporary stop as a substantially stopped state in which the decorative first symbol A variably displayed in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 is not fixed. In the right area 610B and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the variable display of the decorative special symbol continues in a normal variation mode. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decorative first pattern A is variably displayed. Below the left region 610A, a left front region 611A in which a symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative first symbol A is variably displayed is provided as a part of the front variation display region 611.

The front variable display area 611 is provided below the variable display area 610, and the left front area 611A in which the symbol (-1 symbol) before the ornament first symbol A is displayed, and one of the ornament first symbols B The front right area 611B in which the previous symbol (-1 symbol) is displayed, and the symbol (-1 symbol) immediately before the decorative first symbol C
And a middle front area 611C in which a (pattern) is displayed.

As shown in (63) of FIG. 63, immediately before the decoration first symbol A in the left region 610A is temporarily stopped, the left front region 611A located below the same row as the left region 610A has a decoration first symbol A-
"1" is variably displayed as one symbol. In the right area 610B and the middle area 610C, the decorative first symbols B and C continue the variable display (“↓”) in the normal fluctuation mode without temporarily stopping, and also in the right front area 611B and the middle front area 611C. The symbols in front of the decorative first symbols B and C are variably displayed (not shown).

63 (s) is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and then the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B. is there. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decoration first symbol A is in a temporary stop state. Further, the -1 symbol ("1") of the ornament first symbol A displayed in the left front area 611A is hidden immediately before the temporary stop of the ornament first symbol A. As a result, the hold display and the effect image are not obstructed by the -1 pattern, are easy to see, and become conspicuous. That is, the -1 design (“1”) of the decorative first design A is
The decoration "1" of "2" is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the timing of the temporary stop. For example, for a predetermined time, "2" of the decorative first symbol A is located at the upper position of the display screen (((
This time is shorter than the time required to move from the position () to the temporary stop position (the position () in FIG. 63). Similarly, the design (+1 design) after the decoration special design A is hidden immediately before the decoration first design A is temporarily stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased if displayed). Do)
..

It should be noted that the -1 pattern of the decorative first pattern A is not limited to the non-display mode, and the transparency is changed so that the -1 pattern is displayed in a state in which it is more difficult to see than the decorative first pattern A (for example, the transparency is increased). You can also In addition, the decoration 1st pattern A displayed in a state that is difficult to visually recognize immediately before the temporary stop of the pattern A
The -1 symbol of the symbol A may be hidden at the same time as the temporary stop of the decorative first symbol A.

The decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C) in the variable display area 610 in the temporary stop state is, for example,
It becomes a stop mode in which the swing fluctuation fluctuates so as to gently swing with a predetermined symbol. In addition,
The decoration special symbol in the temporary stop state is not limited to the stop mode in which the swing fluctuation occurs, and may be other stop modes as long as it is not the stop mode in which the final stop is performed as the final stop state. For example, before all decoration special symbols (decoration first symbol A to C) are stopped, one or two ornament special symbols (for example, ornament first symbol A and B) are stopped in a temporary stop state. May be

In the right area 610B of the variable display area 610, "5" is displayed as the decoration special symbol just before the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped, and in the right front area 611B below the right region 610B, the decoration first symbol B "-1" is displayed as "4". In the middle area 610C, the decorative first symbol C does not stop and the variable display (“↓”) is continued in the normal variable mode. Further, in the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the variable display of the decorative first symbol C continues in a normal variation mode.

In FIG. 63, (se) is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol C is stopped in the middle area 610C after the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B of the variable display area 610. is there. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decorative first symbol A is in a temporary stop state, and the right area 6
In 10B, "5" of the decorative first symbol B is in a temporary stop state. Also, the right front area 611
The -1 design of the decoration first design B displayed on B is hidden immediately before the decoration first design B is temporarily stopped. As a result, the hold display and the effect image are not obstructed by the -1 pattern, are easy to see, and become conspicuous.

That is, the -1 design (“4”) of the decoration first design B is hidden (erased) at a predetermined time before the timing when the “5” of the decoration first design B is temporarily stopped. For example, the predetermined time is the first decoration
The symbol "5" in the symbol B is changed from the position at the upper portion of the display screen (the position (()) in FIG. 63) to the temporary stop position (see FIG.
The time is shorter than the time required to move to (position). Further, the predetermined time for the -1 design of the decoration first design B may be different from that for the -1 design of the decoration first design A. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the -1 symbol (“4”) is hidden (erased) at the timing when it overlaps the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 643 or when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, the design (+1 design) after the decoration special design B is hidden immediately before the decoration first design B is temporarily stopped.

In addition, the -1 design of the decoration 1st design B is displayed in a state in which it is less visible than the Decorative 1st design B just before the decoration 1st design B is temporarily stopped, like the -1 design of the decoration 1st design A And decoration 1st pattern B
It may be hidden at the same time as the temporary stop.

In the middle area 610C, "4" is displayed as the decoration special symbol immediately before the decoration first symbol C is stopped, and in the middle front area 611C below the middle region 610C, the first decorative symbol -1 pattern. “3” is displayed as.

In FIG. 63, (S) shows the decorative first symbols A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
Is a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the main stop as a fixed stop state. The -1 pattern of the decorative first pattern C displayed in the middle front area 611C is the variable display area 6
Immediately before all the decoration first symbols A to C of 10 and the decoration reduced symbols of the variable display area 615 are completely stopped, they are hidden. As a result, the hold display and the effect image are not obstructed by the -1 pattern, are easy to see, and become conspicuous.

That is, the -1 design (“3”) of the decoration first design C is hidden (erased) at a predetermined time before the timing when the “4” of the decoration first design C is completely stopped. For example, the predetermined time is the first decoration
The symbol C "4" is changed from the position at the upper part of the display screen (the position of (se) in Fig. 63) to the main stop position (Fig. 63).
It is shorter than the time it takes to move to (the position). Further, the predetermined time in the case of the main stop may be different from that in the case of the temporary stop. Note that the -1 symbol may be hidden (erased) at the timing of overlapping the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 643, or at the timing of touching the lower end of the display screen.

Similarly, the design (+1 design) after the decoration special design C is hidden just before the decoration first design C is stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased if displayed). To).

It should be noted that the -1 design of the decorative first design C is displayed in a state in which it is more difficult to see than the decorative first design C immediately before the main stopping of the decorative first design C, and is not displayed at the same time as the main stopping of the decorative first design C. It may be displayed. Further, the pending suspension display 643 corresponding to the running special figure variation display game displayed in the pending digestion area 640 is extinguished as the ornament first symbols A to C and the ornament reduced symbol are stopped, and is hidden. Become.

(Ta) of FIG. 63 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main decoration first decorations A to C and the decoration reduced design are stopped. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game based on the oldest starting memory among the remaining starting memories, the display positions of the respective hold displays 633 in the hold display section 630 are adjacent to each other. The special map 2 displayed on the special map 2 number-of-holds display section 660 while being moved to the display position (holding shift)
The number indicating the number of reservations is switched from "1" to "0". It should be noted that the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 remains “1”.

The hold display 633 located at the end of the hold display unit 630 is deleted from the hold display unit 630,
The variable pending display 643 corresponding to the deleted pending display 633 is displayed in a predetermined manner (as arranged on the pedestal) in the pending digest area 640 (the pending indication 633 is displayed on the pending digest area 640). Hold shift). By executing the holding shift of the holding display 633 to the holding exhaustion area 640 in this way, the holding display 633 located at the end of the holding display portion 630 is
It seems that the display has moved from the hold display portion 630 to the hold digestion area 640. Then, only one hold display 633 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed on the hold display portion 630.

When the next special figure variable display game is started, the pattern (-1 pattern) preceding the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) in the variable display area 610 and the one after the decorative special symbol Design (+1
(Symbol) is displayed (display of ±1 symbol), and fluctuation starts. The decorative special symbol and its ±1 symbol are displayed in a line in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) on the display screen.

The +1 symbol of the decorative special symbol is the rear variable display area 6 provided above the variable display area 610.
12 is displayed. In the rear variation display area 612, a left rear area 612A in which the design (+1 design) after the decoration first design A is displayed and a design (+1 design) in the rear of the decoration first design B are displayed. And a right rear area 612B, and a middle rear area 612C in which a pattern (+1 pattern) after the decoration first pattern C is displayed.

As shown in (63) of FIG. 63, the -1 symbol of the decorative special symbol is displayed in the previous variable display area 611 provided below the variable display area 610, and the +1 symbol is above the variable display area 610. After being provided, it is displayed in the variable display area 612.

Specifically, in the left front area 611A, "1" as the -1 design of the decorative first design A ("2")
Is displayed, and a part of “3” is displayed as a +1 symbol in the left rear area 612A. In the front right area 611B, a part of "4" is displayed as the -1 design of the decorative first design B ("5"), and in the rear right area 612B, a part of "6" is displayed as the +1 design. It Nakamae area 61
Part of "3" is displayed as the -1 design of the decorative first design C ("4") in 1C, and part of "5" is displayed as the +1 design in the middle rear area 612C.

Actually, as shown in (a) of FIG. 63, a part of the front variation display area 611 and the rear variation display area 612 are part of the display device 41 depending on the position of the decorative special symbol that is changed. However, it is also possible to change the enlargement ratio (size) of the enlarged display of the decorative special symbol so that all ±1 symbols are displayed.

[Example of screen transition when the number of pending calls has reached the upper limit]
FIG. 64 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and the total number of holdings (the number of starting memories, the number of special figure holdings) is the upper limit number in the normal gaming state ( This is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the number of games has reached 8). In the following description of FIGS. 64 to 66A, the description overlapping with FIG. 63 will be appropriately omitted.

64C shows the display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. (C) in FIG. 64
Then, the special map 1 variable display game is executed in a state where the total pending number has accumulated to the upper limit.
Therefore, the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number is displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 indicates the special figure 2 reserved number. The number "4" is displayed, and the upper limit is 8 in total. Further, eight hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display section 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

64 (one) is a decorative first pattern A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
The decorative reduced design of is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the main stop. When the total number of reservations has reached the upper limit, in order to reduce the variation time, the shortening variation or the ultra-shortening variation is executed, and all the ornament first symbols A to C and the ornament reduced symbols are permanently stopped at the same time. .. Therefore, when the total reserved number has reached the upper limit, the decorative first symbols A and B are not temporarily stopped.

Immediately before the decoration first design A to C and the decoration reduced design are stopped, as shown in (64) of FIG. 64, "2" is variably displayed as the decoration first design A in the left area 610A, and the left front area is displayed. 6
In 11A, "1" is variably displayed as the -1 design of the decorative first design A. Right area 610
"5" is variably displayed as the decoration first symbol B on B, and "4" is variably displayed as the -1 symbol of the decoration first symbol B on the right front area 611B. "4" is variably displayed as the decoration first symbol C in the middle area 610C, and "3" as the -1 symbol of the decoration first symbol C in the middle front area 611C.
Is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 64E shows the decorative first symbols A to C and the variable display area 615 of the variable display area 610.
The decorative reduced design of is the display screen of the display device 41 when the book is stopped. Previous change display area 6
11 (left front area 611A, right front area 611B, middle front area 611C) each of the symbols (each -1 symbol) before the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) displayed in the variable display region 61
Immediately before all the decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design in the variable display area 615 are completely stopped, they are hidden. As a result, the hold display and the effect image are not obstructed by each -1 symbol, are easy to see, and become conspicuous.

That is, each -1 symbol of the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) is hidden (erased) a predetermined time before the timing at which the decorative special symbol is permanently stopped. For example, for a predetermined time, the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) is moved from the position at the upper part of the display screen (the position of (Fig. 64)) to the main stop position (the position of (Fig. 64)) It is shorter than the time to do.

Note that each -1 symbol may be hidden (erased) at a timing when it overlaps the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 643. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which each -1 symbol is hidden (erased) at the timing when it touches the lower end of the display screen.

Also, similarly, each design (each +1 design) after the decorative special design (decoration first design A to C)
Is hidden immediately before all the decoration first symbols are completely stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased if displayed).

FIG. 64 (and) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main decoration first decorations A to C and the decoration reduced design are stopped. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, each hold display 633 in the hold display portion 630 is started.
Is shifted on hold, and the number indicating the number of reserved special maps 2 displayed on the special map 2 reserved number display portion 660 is switched from “4” to “3”. It should be noted that the number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 remains “4”.

Further, the holding shift of the holding display 633 to the holding exhaustion area 640 is executed, and the holding display 633 located at the end of the holding display unit 630 is changed from the holding display unit 630 to the holding exhaustion area 640.
The display changes to the changing pending display 643. The number of pending displays 633 on the pending display unit 630 is changed from eight to seven.

When the next special figure variation display game is started, as in the case where the total pending number has not reached the upper limit, one or more symbols before and after the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) in the variable display area 610 (±1
(Pattern) is displayed and fluctuation starts.

Then, as shown in (A) of FIG. 64, the next special figure variation display game is executed. FIG. 64
(N) is the display screen of the display device 41 during execution of the next special figure variation display game.

It should be noted that, even if the total pending number has reached the upper limit number, in a predetermined case, the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 62 or FIG. 63 may be executed without executing the shortening fluctuation (ultra-shortening fluctuation). For example, the first special map variation display game (first rotation of the electric support state) when the time saving state (universal power support state, electric support state) or the last special map just before the time saving state ends In the variable display game (last rotation in the electric power support state), the normal fluctuation can be executed even when the total number of holdings reaches the upper limit.

In addition, the first special figure variation display game when the variation pattern or variation effect in the time saving state changes significantly (for example, when the mode or stage changes at the 50th electric support frequency), or the variation pattern or variation effect in the normal gaming state In the first special figure variation display game (eg, the first rotation when the mode or stage changes) in the case where the total change is large, it is possible to execute the normal change even when the total pending number reaches the upper limit. it can.

[Example of screen transition when reach state occurs in normal state]
FIG. 65A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the reach state occurs in the normal game state.

(A) of FIG. 65A is the display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. In FIG. 65A, (
In (2), the special map 2 variable display game is executed in a state where the total pending number is three.
Therefore, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number is displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 at the upper left corner of the display screen, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 indicates the special figure 2 reserved number. The number "1" is displayed and the total is 3. Further, three hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display section 630 at the lower center of the display screen.

(A) of FIG. 65A is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decorative first symbol A that is variably displayed in the left area 610A of the variably display area 610 is temporarily stopped. When the reach state occurs, during the variable display, immediately before the decoration first design A is temporarily stopped, the decoration first design -1 of -1
The design is hidden. In the left area 610A of the variable display area 610, "2" is displayed as the decoration special symbol immediately before the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped.

The timing at which the -1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is hidden (erased) differs depending on whether the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) or when the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, for example, the timing at which the -1 design of the decorative first design A is hidden is
The timing at which all or part of "2" of the decorative first design A is displayed on the display screen may be used.
This can suggest that the reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the ornamental first symbol A is hidden immediately before the ornamental first symbol A is temporarily stopped (whether it is not displayed from the beginning,
If displayed, delete it).

(A) in FIG. 65A is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610 and then the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B. is there. In the left area 610A, "2" of the decoration first pattern A is in a temporary stop state, and the decoration first
The ±1 symbols (“1”, “3”) of the symbol A are hidden. When the reach state occurs, the decorative first symbol B is displayed even during the variable display in the right area 610B as in the left area 610A.
Immediately before the temporary stop, the -1 design of the decorative first design B is hidden. Variable display area 610
In the right area 610B, "2" is displayed as the decoration special symbol immediately before the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped.

The timing at which the -1 design of the decorative first design B is hidden (erased) differs depending on whether the reach state occurs (FIG. 65A) or when the reach state does not occur (FIG. 63).
For example, in FIG. 65A, the timing at which the -1 design of the decoration first design B is hidden is the decoration first design
The timing at which all or part of “2” of the symbol B is displayed on the display screen may be used. This can suggest that the reach state occurs. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the ornamental first symbol B is hidden immediately before the ornamental first symbol B is temporarily stopped (not displayed from the beginning or erased if it is displayed).

(A) of FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the reach state occurs because the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B of the variable display area 610. In the right area 610B, "2" of the decoration first design B is in a temporary stop state similarly to the decoration first design A of the left area 610A, and the ±1 design of the decoration first design A ("1", "3"). )) is hidden. Further, the reach effect is executed when the reach state occurs, and for example, the character "reach" can be displayed on the display screen by the reach effect as shown in () of FIG. 65A.

(A) of FIG. 65A is the decorative first symbol A to C of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 61.
The decorative reduced design 5 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the book is stopped. Nakamae area 611
The -1 design of the decoration first design C (“3”) displayed in C is just before the decoration first designs A to C in the variable display area 610 and the decoration reduced designs in the variable display area 615 are completely stopped. , Will be hidden. For example, the timing at which the -1 design of the decoration first design C is hidden (erased) may be the timing at which the whole or part of "3" of the decoration first design C is displayed on the display screen. Similarly, the +1 symbol of the ornamental first symbol C is hidden immediately before the ornamental first symbol C is stopped (it is not displayed from the beginning or is erased if it is displayed).

(A) of FIG. 65A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main decoration symbols A to C and the decoration reduced symbols are stopped. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, each hold display 63 in the hold display portion 630 is started.
As the number 3 is reserved and shifted, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved displayed on the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 is switched from “2” to “1”. It should be noted that the number indicating the special figure 2 reserved number displayed in the special figure 2 reserved number display portion 660 remains “1”.

Further, the holding shift of the holding display 633 to the holding exhaustion area 640 is executed, and the holding display 633 located at the end of the holding display unit 630 is changed from the holding display unit 630 to the holding exhaustion area 640.
Move to. The number of holding displays 633 of the holding display unit 630 is changed from three to two.

When the next special figure variation display game is started, the symbols (±1 symbol) before and after one of the decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) in the variable display area 610 are displayed and the variation is started. The decorative special symbol and its ±1 symbol are displayed in the same row in one direction (for example, the vertical direction) on the display screen.

[Screen transition example 1 when a pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect occurs.

65B (nu') is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect is generated from (ni) in FIG. 65A, and the variation display is performed in the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. It is a display screen when the decoration 1st design A ("5") is temporarily stopped.

In (Nu') of FIG. 65B, when the decoration first pattern A is temporarily stopped in the left area 610A, the decoration first
The -1 symbol of symbol A is hidden. On the other hand, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is the stop symbol ("
6”) (see (F′) of FIG. 65B), the decorative first symbol A +1 symbol (“6”)
) Is not hidden, but a part of it is displayed on the display screen.

(B) of FIG. 65B is the right area 6 of the variable display area 610 when the pseudo continuous effect is generated.
The display device 41 when the decoration first symbol B (“5”) that is variably displayed in 10B is temporarily stopped.
Is a display screen of. The decoration first design A (“5”) and the decoration first design B (“5”) are arranged in the same design and temporarily stopped. When the decoration first design B temporarily stops in the right area 610B, the -1 design of the decoration first design B is also hidden, as in the decoration first design A of the left area 610A, and the +1 design of the decoration first design B. A part of ("6") is continuously displayed. The display of the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is continued because the +1 symbol becomes the main stop symbol (“6”) (FIG. 65B).
(See (fu')). In addition, the decoration first symbol C in the middle area 610C is a symbol for exclusive use of pseudo-relation ("ream").
) Is variably displayed, and "3" is variably displayed in the -1 design of the decorative first design C.

(B' in FIG. 65B) is a display of the display device 41 when the first unit variation display is finished in the pseudo continuous effect and the decoration first symbols A to C are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped). It is a screen.
When the decoration first symbols A to C are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous effect, the decoration first symbol C in the middle area 610C is temporarily stopped in the state in which the pseudo continuous symbol (“ream”) is displayed, and the decoration first pattern is displayed. ± of pattern C
One design is hidden. The decorative reduced pattern in the variable display area 615 continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

(B) of FIG. 65B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, the +1 symbol (“4”) of the decorative first symbol C is displayed again in the middle rear region 612C above the middle region 610C. When the decorative first symbol C displays a pseudo-only symbol ("ream"), the +1 symbol (-1 symbol after the -1 symbol ("3") of the ornament first symbol C) "4")
It is displayed in the middle rear area 612C of the rear variation display area 612. Further, in the front variation display area 611, the −1 symbol (“3”) is displayed in the middle front region 611C, but the −1 symbol is not displayed in the left front region 611A and the right front region 611B.

(B) of FIG. 65B shows the display device 4 when the unit variation display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect.
1 is a display screen of No. 1. When the unit fluctuation display is restarted, the first decoration that was temporarily displayed
The symbols A to C are displayed as normal fluctuations (“↓↓↓”). It should be noted that the starting memory is not consumed when the unit fluctuation display is restarted in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, the reserved digestion area 64
The special figure changing pending display 643 (special figure digesting pending display) displayed at 0 is maintained in a state of being displayed on the pedestal.

(B') of FIG. 65B is the display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variable display is restarted in the pseudo continuous effect and then the temporary stop display is performed again. Decorative first design A, B, the first decorative design A, when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect (see (ha') in FIG. 65B)
It is temporarily stopped again with the +1 symbol of B (“6”, “6”). Further, the decoration first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with the pseudo-repeated symbol ("ream"). After that, the third unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, and the final stop symbol is fixed. Then, for example, when the stop symbol is confirmed by "666", it is a big hit, and when it is confirmed by "626", it is a loss.

It should be noted that the temporary stop display may be performed again in the unit fluctuation display after the third time. In this case, for example, every time the temporary stop display is performed, the display screen is repeatedly transited in the order of FIG. 65B (hi') and (fu'), and when the final stop symbol is finalized (fu') The display screen is changed.

When the pseudo continuous effect is generated, the timing at which the ±1 symbol of the decorative first symbol is hidden is different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not generated (FIGS. 63, 64, and 65A), the pseudo continuous effect. Can be notified. Further, since the reach effect and the pseudo continuous effect are common from the viewpoint that two identical first decorative patterns A and B are aligned, ±1 when the pseudo continuous effect occurs
The timing at which the symbols are hidden may be the same as the case where the reach in FIG. 65A occurs.

[Screen transition example 2 when a pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65C is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect is generated.

65C is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect is generated from (A) of FIG. 65A, and changes in the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. It is a display screen when the displayed decoration first symbol A ("3") is temporarily stopped.

In (Nu) of FIG. 65C, when the decoration first pattern A stops in the left area 610A, the decoration first
Along with the −1 symbol (“2”) of the symbol A, the +1 symbol (“4”) is also hidden. This is because the +1 design of the decorative first design A does not become the regular stop design (“8”) and is not necessary ((fu' in FIG. 65C.
')reference).

65C is a display device when the decorative first symbol B (“3”) that is variably displayed in the right area 610B of the variability display area 610 when the pseudo continuous effect occurs is temporarily stopped. Four
1 is a display screen of No. 1. The decoration 1st design A (“3”) and the decoration 1st design B (“3”) will be provisionally stopped with the same design. When the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B, the ±1 symbol of the decoration first symbol B is also hidden like the decoration first symbol A in the left area 610A. The +1 symbol (“4”) of the decoration first symbol B is hidden, and the +1 symbol is the regular stop symbol (“8”)
This is because it is different from (see (F) of FIG. 65C). In addition, the pseudo first symbol C (“ream”) is variably displayed on the ornament first symbol C in the middle area 610C, and “6” is displayed on the −1 symbol of the ornament first symbol C.
Is displayed in a variable manner.

(C) of FIG. 65C shows the display device 41 when the first unit variation display is finished in the pseudo continuous effect and the decoration first symbols A to C are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped). It is a display screen. 65C is the same as (No in FIG. 65C) except that "3" and "3" are displayed on the decoration first designs A and B, and the +1 design of the decoration first designs A and B is hidden. ..

(C) in FIG. 65C is the display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit variation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, the +1 symbol (“7”) of the decorative first symbol C is displayed in the middle back region 612C above the middle region 610C, and the lower part of the middle region 610C is displayed. -1 pattern of the first pattern C decorated in the middle front area 611C ("6
)) is displayed again. In addition, the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A and B are maintained in the non-display state.

(C) of FIG. 65C is the display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variation display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the unit variable display is restarted, the decorative first symbols A to C, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed as in (H′) of FIG. 65B, become normal variable display (“↓↓↓”). Note that the decorative first symbols A and B, which are hidden from (No" to (No) in FIG. 65C)
±1 symbols (“2” and “4”) may be excluded from the variable display symbol array in the left area 610A and the right area 610B. That is, in (C) of FIG. 65C, the player can visually recognize that the identification information is fluctuated in the symbol array in which “2” and “4” are omitted on the left and right of the display screen, and “2” is displayed. It is possible to recognize that “” and “4” are not the regular stop symbols (“8”).

(C) of FIG. 65C is the display screen of the display device 41 when the unit variable display is restarted in the pseudo continuous effect and then the temporary stop display is performed again. The decorative first symbols A and B are +1 of the decorative first symbols A and B which are hidden when the temporary change is temporarily stopped in the first unit fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous effect.
It is temporarily stopped again with a symbol ("8", "8") different from the symbol ("4", "4"). The different symbol is a symbol that becomes the stopped symbol.

In addition, the decoration first symbol C is temporarily stopped again with the pseudo-repeated symbol (“ream”). afterwards,
The third unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect, and the final stop symbol is fixed. Then, when the final stop symbol is confirmed with "888", for example, it is a big hit, and when it is confirmed with "838", it is out of alignment. In the unit variable display after the third time, the temporary stop display is performed again by transitioning the display screen in the order of FIG. 65C (hi'') and (fu'') every time the temporary stop display is performed. May be

Further, every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the ±1 symbol of the temporarily stopped symbol may be hidden and removed from the variable display symbol array. By doing so, the symbols that are stopped permanently or the symbols that reach each time are narrowed down every time the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is increased, so that it becomes easy to understand even if the symbol of interest is variably displayed at high speed, and the interest is improved. Further, when the symbol to be squeezed is a probability variation symbol, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention, so that the interest can be further improved.

[Screen transition example 3 when pseudo continuous effect occurs]
FIG. 65D is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is a second another example of the screen transition of the entire game when the pseudo continuous effect is generated. ..

65D is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display when the pseudo continuous effect is generated from (in) of FIG. 65A, and is the left area 610A of the variation display area 610. It is a display screen when the decoration first design A (“3”) that is variably displayed is temporarily stopped. With the temporary stop of the decoration first design A, the ±1 designs (“2” and “4”) of the decoration first design A are hidden (may be in a visually difficult state).

In FIG. 65D, (ne ″′) is the decorative first symbol B, C (“4”, which is variably displayed in the right area 610B and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610 when the pseudo continuous effect is generated. "
4”) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the vehicle temporarily stops. The same symbols (“4” and “4”) are displayed on the ornament first symbols B and C, and the symbols are, for example, the ornament first symbols A that are temporarily stopped.
It is a pattern after one of ("3").

As shown in FIG. 65D (ne'''), the decoration first symbols B and C are temporarily stopped at the same position as the temporarily stopped decoration first symbol A so as not to be in one horizontal line. It Therefore,
Since the decoration first patterns A to C are different from the normal stop mode in which they are lined up in a horizontal line in an effective line relationship, the player feels a sense of incongruity and can have an expectation that a pseudo continuous effect will occur. ..

Decorative first designs B and C, which are temporarily stopped at a position offset from the decorative first design A, are decorative first designs.
It may be the same symbol (“3”) or −1 symbol (“2”) as the symbol A. In this case, "3" of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed on the display screen, but "3" is displayed at the position where the lines are offset.
Is displayed, the player can determine that the decorative first symbols A to C are not arranged in a horizontal row in an effective line relationship, and can recognize that it is not a big hit.

In FIG. 65D, "('") is a pseudo continuous effect in which the first unit variation display is finished and the decoration first
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the symbols A to C are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped). Other than the point that "3" is displayed on the decoration first design A, "4" and "4" are displayed on the decoration first design B and C, and the +1 design of the decoration first design B and C is not displayed. Is (ne''' in Figure 65D)
) Is the same.

In FIG. 65D, (“″”) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous effect. When the second unit fluctuation display is started in the pseudo continuous production,
The +1 symbols (“5”, “5”) of the decorative first symbols B and C are displayed in the right rear region 612B and the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display region 612, respectively. The ±1 symbol of the decorative first symbol A is maintained in the non-display state. Thereafter, as shown in (H″) of FIG. 65C, the unit fluctuation display of the pseudo continuous effect is continued.

[Screen transition example of the whole game when other effect display occurs]
FIG. 66A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when various effect displays are generated.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display. In FIG. 66A, (
As shown in (1), in the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41, a button operation promotion display (at a position overlapping at least one of the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the hold display section 630, and the hold exhaustion area 640 ( An operation promotion image) 670, a warning display (warning image) 679,
Is displayed. The button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) 670 is a display that prompts the player to operate the effect button 25. The warning display (warning image) 679 is a display for giving some warning to the player, and here is a display for not touching a movable member provided in a frame such as the glass frame 15. The button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 are displayed in the middle area 61.
The decoration special pattern of 0C, the reserved display portion 630, and the reserved digestion area 640 are arranged on the front surface (upper layer) and displayed with priority.

In the upper right corner of the display screen, there is displayed a firing position instruction display (a firing position instruction character, right hitting instruction notification) 691 for instructing a right hit. At the lower left corner of the display screen, a remaining time display (remaining time character) 673 for displaying the remaining time in the effect mode state in which a special effect can be generated is displayed. The production mode state includes, for example, a mission mode for presenting achievement conditions such as “make a reach within 5 minutes!”, a mode for expecting a latent change in latency, and a pre-reading production mode based on a preliminary determination for holding. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, a BGM display 674 displaying the selected BGM.
Is displayed.

At the left end of the display screen, in a position overlapping the left area 610A of the variable display area 610, a specific game state display including an image such as "RUSH" indicating that the specific game state has occurred (
A specific game state image) 675 is displayed. The specific game state display 675 is arranged on the back surface (lower layer) of the left area 610A and is displayed without priority.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol A (“2”) that is variably displayed in the left area 610A of the variability display area 610 is temporarily stopped. As shown in (63) of FIG. 63, just before the decoration first design A in the left area 610A is temporarily stopped, a part of the -1 design (“1”) of the decoration first design A in the left front area 611A is partially displayed. It disappears, and the image (“RUSH”) of the specific game state display 675 displayed on the back of the −1 symbol becomes recognizable. In addition, the -1 design (“1”) of the decoration first design A displayed in the left front area 611A is the decoration first design A
All are hidden immediately before ((2)) is temporarily stopped. Also, the +1 design of the decorative first design A,
It is not displayed in the left rear area 612A of the rear variation display area 612.

66A is a first pattern A (“2”) that is decorated in the left area 610A of the variable display area 610.
) Is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol B (“5”) is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B. Similarly to the temporary stop of the decoration first design A of the left area 610A, just before the decoration first design B of the right area 610B is temporarily stopped, the decoration first design B of the right front area 611B -1 design (“4”) Is partially disappeared, and the BGM display 674 displayed at a position overlapping with the -1 symbol becomes easy to recognize. All the -1 symbols ("4") of the ornament first symbol B displayed in the front right area 611B are hidden immediately before the ornament first symbol B ("5") is temporarily stopped. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol B is not displayed in the right rear area 612B of the rear variation display area 612.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the decoration first symbol C is temporarily stopped in the middle area 610C after the decoration first symbol B is temporarily stopped in the right area 610B of the variable display area 610. is there. Similarly to the temporary stop of the decoration first design A in the left area 610A and the decoration first design B in the right area 610B, just before the decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design are stopped, the middle front area 611
Part of the display of the -1 design ("3") of the decorative first design C of C disappears, and the button operation promotion display 670 and the warning display 679 displayed at the position overlapping with the -1 design are easy to recognize. Left area 610
In A, "2" of the decoration first symbol A is in a temporary stop state, and in the right area 610B, "5" of the decoration first symbol B is in a temporary stop state.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display region 610 and the decorative reduced symbol in the display region 615 are permanently stopped. The -1 design of the decoration first design C displayed in the middle front area 611C is hidden immediately before the decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design are all stopped. Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbol C is not displayed in the middle rear region 612C of the rear variation display region 612.

66A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next special figure variation display game is started after the main decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design are stopped. When the special figure 2 variable display game is started as the next special figure variable display game, the decoration first symbol A to the variable display area 610 is started.
C is displayed in reverse fluctuation so as to temporarily trace back to the upper side of the display screen (minus fluctuation), and a part of each -1 symbol is displayed in the previous fluctuation display area 611. After that, the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed in a normal variable manner. Note that the decorative reduced pattern in the variable display area 615 is normally variably displayed in a variation mode that sequentially changes on the spot without scrolling.

The first decorative designs A to C of the second embodiment described above are composed of a frame and a number part, but in addition to the frame and the number part, a character part and a decorative part of the frame are added to form one design. You may comprise. In this case, the character portion or the decorative portion of the frame may be hidden instead of hiding the symbol itself or making it difficult to visually recognize. Further, after reducing the design, the character portion and the decorative portion of the frame or the frame may be hidden so that only the numeral portion can be seen. In addition, since the time saving state (universal power support state, power support state) is a shortened variation (ultra-shortening variation), the character portion and the decorative portion of the frame may not be displayed.

In the second embodiment, the decoration first pattern A (left large pattern) and the decoration second pattern B (right large pattern) that are temporarily stopped are pseudo continuous patterns or temporary patterns on the decoration first pattern C (middle large pattern). Since it is not necessary to gaze until the stop symbol is displayed, the decoration first symbol C may be moved to the outer edge of the display screen of the display device 41 or reduced so that the ornament first symbol C can be easily seen.

Further, in the second embodiment, by maximally expanding the decorative first symbols A to C temporarily and permanently stopped until the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C disappear or there is no room for display. , ±1 pattern, or both may be hidden.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C that are temporarily stopped or permanently stopped may be hidden or difficult to be visually recognized by the pending change notice (prefetch notice effect). According to such an aspect, since it is possible to prevent the design and the hold display 633 from overlapping, it is possible to easily display the effect of the hold change notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the total pending number is 0 after the decoration first symbols A to C are stopped, the next special figure variation display game is not started. As shown in (S), the non-display state of the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C is continued.
However, in order for the player to easily understand that the game is not being executed or that the game can be performed, even if the special figure variable display game is not executed, a predetermined time has elapsed or a predetermined operation is executed. By doing so, the ±1 symbols of the ornament first symbols A to C are changed to, for example, ((
It may be redisplayed as shown in FIG.

The predetermined time is, for example, when the production control device 300 receives the customer waiting demo command and the customer waiting demo is executed, or when a certain time has passed since the special figure variation display game ended.
It is determined that the time has elapsed, and the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed again. Further, the predetermined operation is, for example, a button operation (operation of the effect button 25) for displaying a screen for confirming the game history and a screen for adjusting the volume or brightness when the special figure variation display game is not executed. When it is performed, it is determined that it has been executed, and the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed again.
In addition, when an operation of turning off the screen for confirming the displayed game history and the screen for adjusting the volume or the brightness is performed, it is determined that a predetermined operation is performed, and ± of the decorative first symbols A to C is determined. One symbol may be displayed again.

According to such an aspect, the player can easily understand that the game is not being executed and that the game can be performed when the special figure variation display is not being executed.

[Modification]
As a modified example of the above second embodiment, the following configuration may be adopted.

In the second embodiment, the decorative first patterns A to C are displayed in the variable display area 610 so as to be arranged in one line in the horizontal direction. However, as shown in FIG. 66B, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed horizontally. You may display so that it may line up in three lines of a direction. That is, what is completely displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 is one line in the horizontal direction of the decorative first symbols A to C in the second embodiment, but in the modified example, three lines in the horizontal direction are displayed. It is a line.

FIG. 66B is a screen transition diagram showing in time series the display screen of the display device 41 in the case where the decoration first symbol is displayed in a plurality of lines in the modification of the second embodiment. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the second embodiment.

As shown in (or) of FIG. 66B, the variable display area 610 according to the modification of the second embodiment is
Divided into 3×3 regions (upper left region 610A1, left middle region 610A2, lower left region 610A3, upper right region 610B1, right middle region 610B2, lower right region 610B3, middle upper region 610C1, middle middle region 610C2, middle lower region 610C3). And each area is decorated with the first pattern A
~ C is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the +1 symbol of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment is the variable display area 6
The decorations of the upper 10 areas (upper left area 610A1, upper right area 610B1, and middle upper area 610C1) are one pattern after the decoration first patterns A to C. Similarly, the -1 pattern of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment is the lower region of the variable display region 610 (lower left region 610A3,
The lower right region 610B3, the lower middle region 610C3) is a design that is one before the decorative first designs AC.

In the second embodiment, the mode in which the decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design are variably displayed is displayed as “↓↓↓”, but as shown in (or) of FIG. In the modification of the form, the decorative first symbols A to C displayed in the variable display are displayed in the 3×3 format so that the variable display area 610 is an area of 3 rows and 3 columns (3×3). There is.

66B is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration first designs A to C and the decoration reduced design are completely stopped. The ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C according to the modified example of the second embodiment are hidden as in the second embodiment. In addition, the ±1 symbols of the first symbols A to C may be in a form that is difficult to visually recognize.

Further, also in the special figure variation display game according to the modified example of the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect can be performed as in the second embodiment. Specifically, similar to FIGS. 65B and C of the second embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed by using a symbol for exclusive use of pseudo rendition (“ream”), and similarly to FIG. 65D of the second embodiment, A pseudo continuous effect may be performed by temporarily stopping the three decoration first patterns B and C at positions where the rows are shifted so as not to be in one horizontal row with the three decoration first designs A. Also, in the pseudo continuous effect according to the modified example, as in the second embodiment, the decorative first symbol A
~C +1 design (decoration one pattern after the decoration first design A to C in the upper area of the variable display area 610) and decoration first design AC -1 pattern (lower display of the variable display area 610) The decoration first symbol A to C) of the area) may be hidden or difficult to see, and the hidden ±1 symbol may be removed from the variable display symbol array.

Even with the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the second embodiment, the same effect as that of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment can be obtained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of identification information (decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C), ornament reduced symbol) are displayed in a plurality of columns in a variable display. A display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a game (special figure variable display game) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game are provided.
The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute stop control for causing the predetermined identification information in the variable display to be in the stopped state (main stop state), and before executing the stop control, the predetermined control in the variable display is performed. The identification information displayed in the same row as the identification information and displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information (-1 pattern or +1 pattern) is more difficult to visually recognize than the predetermined identification information (for example, Show or hide with high transparency).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes easy to see the mode in which the pending display 633 of the pending display unit 630 and the pending display during the special figure change of the pending digestion area 640 are pending-shifted at the time of the main stop, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, even when the effect display or the like is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A, the effect display can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention at the time of the main stop, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be made.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a temporary stop control for causing the predetermined identification information in the variable display to be a temporary stop state different from the stop state, and the change can be performed before executing the temporary stop control. The identification information (-1 pattern or +1 pattern) displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information being displayed is displayed or hidden in a state that is more difficult to visually recognize than the predetermined identification information. .. Therefore, during the temporary stop, the hold display of the hold display unit 630 and the hold exhaustion area 6
At 40, it becomes easy to see the pending display during special figure change during digestion, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, in particular, even when the effect display is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A,
At the time of the main stop and at the time of the temporary stop, the effect display can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the production control means (production control device 300) matches the identification information that makes the temporary stop state by the temporary stop control with the identification information that makes the stop state by the stop control, and stops before the execution of the temporary stop control. Identification information (-1 pattern or +1 pattern) displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the identification information to be in a state is displayed in a state that is more difficult to visually recognize than the identification information to be in a stopped state,
Or hide it. Therefore, at the time of temporary stop, it is possible to avoid making other displays difficult to be visually recognized by the identification information displayed before or after the temporarily stopped identification information, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, according to such an aspect, at the time of temporary stop, the player is
It is easier to recognize the temporarily stopped identification information than the identification information displayed before or after the identification information. Then, when the identification information for the temporary stop state and the identification information for the stop state match, the player may determine that the identification information recognized during the temporary stop is the identification information for the main stop as it is. Since it is possible to easily understand the progress of the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, by making the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C non-display or difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbols to be stopped or temporarily stopped. Furthermore, since the ±1 symbol is hidden or difficult to be visually recognized, the player can easily pay attention to the content of the warning display 679, so that the content of the warning display 679 can be easily recognized and the warning can be smoothly handled. become. Further, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the ±1 symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C from overlapping a specific screen display (dramatic display image) such as the hold display 633, so that decorativeness is secured and an effect is obtained. It is possible to carry out a realistic production and improve the interest.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first and second embodiments.

[Single-shot command processing of the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the single-shot system command processing (B1212) of the third embodiment in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described. 67, production control device 300
5 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by. In addition, B1
The processing from 301 to B1322 is the same as the processing of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 35).
reference).

Production control device 300 of the third embodiment, after setting the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1322), executes the production setting process during stop (B1323), single-shot system command processing finish.

[Stop production setting process]
With reference to FIG. 68, the details of the stop production setting process (B1323) in the one-shot type command process of the above-described third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect setting process during stop which is executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first sets the non-display timing of the large symbol (identification information, decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C)) that is being stopped and displayed (B2501), and then the small symbol that is being stopped and displayed. The non-display timing of the design (identification information, decoration reduced design (decoration second design)) is set (B2502).

Next, the production control device 300, the hold display being displayed (hold display 633 of the hold display unit 630.
, Non-display timing of the special figure changing pending display 643 of the pending digestion area 640 is set (
B2503). Here, the non-display timing for displaying the number of holdings may also be set.

Then, in the effect control device 300, the display result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (big hit).
Or not (B2504).

When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, effect control device 300 sets the appearance timing (display timing) at which the fanfare background (background used during fanfare) appears (B2505), and then After setting the display mode and appearance mode of the fanfare background (B2506), the stopped effect setting process is ended.

If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the effect control device 300 ends the stopped effect setting process as it is.

[Timing chart of display when big hit]
Next, a change in the display mode of the display screen when a big hit occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a timing chart for explaining changes in the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, during the special figure variation display game, the decoration first symbol A to C (large pattern, special decoration symbol), the decoration second symbol (small pattern, ornament reduced pattern), the number of holding display (special symbol 1 Hold number display section 6
50 or the special figure 2 display of the number of holdings display section 660), a standby hold display (holding display 633), and a special figure changing pending display 643 (special figure digesting pending display) are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. There is. On the other hand, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 are not displayed and hidden on the display screen.

Time T1 is the time at which the symbol stop command is received by the effect control device 300 (B1319), and the special figure variation display game being executed is variably stopped. When the special figure changing display game stops changing at time T1, the special figure changing pending display 643 disappears. At this time, for example, the pedestal indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may remain displayed. As the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit, the display mode of the display screen changes as follows. In this case, it is desirable that the pedestal showing the reserved digestion area 640 be hidden at the timing when the decorative first symbols A to C described later are hidden or at the timing when the big hit display is started.

A period from time T1 to time T2 is a game result confirmation period A in which the result of the special figure variation display game can be confirmed. In the game result confirmation period A, the display of the symbols (identification information) that have been permanently stopped is maintained in the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol so that the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game. ing. Further, in the game result confirmation period A, the suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of the special game state is executed, and the fanfare background 680 starts to be displayed.

Time T2 is the time when the special game transition period B for transitioning to the special game state is started. When the special game transition period B is started at time T2, the decorative first symbols A to C and the standby hold display are hidden. The period consisting of the game result confirmation period A and the special game transition period B is the display time set in step A4703 (standby time for decoration special figure variation, stop display time).
Or corresponds to the display time (standby time for decoration special figure variation, stop display time) set in step B1321. The display time set in step A4703 and the display time set in step B1321 are basically the same.

At time T3, the fanfare command is received by the effect control device 300 (B2101).
It is the time when the fanfare display period C for performing the fanfare display is started.
The fanfare display period C is a time corresponding to the fanfare time set in the special figure displaying process (FIG. 23) (A4821). At time T3, the fanfare display period C is started, so that the big hit display for notifying the big hit is also started. When the big hit display is started, a "big hit" character 681 indicating the big hit is displayed as the big hit display. Further, the display of the decorative second symbol and the number of holdings are hidden.

Time T4 is the time when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round of the special game state (big hit state) starts. At time T4, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 are hidden.

In the present embodiment, the start of the big hit display may be regarded as the start of the special game state, or the start of the big hit round may be regarded as the start of the special game state.

[Example of screen transition when it becomes a big hit]
FIG. 70 is a screen transition diagram showing in time series the display screens of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the third embodiment.

70(a) is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game before the big hit. In FIG. 70( et al.), with the execution of the special figure variable display game, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the variable display area 610, and the decorative second symbols (small symbols, decorative reduced patterns) are displayed in the variable display area 615. It is variably displayed.

(RI) of FIG. 70 is the display screen of the display device 41 immediately after the start of the game result confirmation period A after the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbol that are variably displayed are stopped. In the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, the stop display of "777" indicating that the result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit is stopped and displayed as the decoration first symbol A to C or the decoration second symbol. ing. Therefore, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game during the game result confirmation period A.

(R) of FIG. 70 is a display screen of the display device 41 at the time when the fanfare background 680 starts to be displayed due to the execution of the suggestion suggesting the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state) during the game result confirmation period A. .. The fanfare background 680 is different from the “big hit” characters 681 and the like, and indirectly functions as a first notification image that indirectly indicates that a special gaming state has occurred, that is, implicitly notifies that the special gaming state has occurred. The first notification image has a mode (for example, a lively mode) that causes the player to expect a big hit, but does not include information that directly indicates a big hit like the “big hit” character 681. The fanfare background 680 is displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. Therefore,
The fanfare background 680 does not hide the first decorative designs AC and the second decorative design.

70(r), the fanfare background 680 is displayed in a manner that it slides in the display screen (slide-in display), but it may be displayed in other presentation modes. For example, the fanfare background 680 may be displayed entirely at once in the display screen (
A pop-up display) or a part of the display screen may be displayed (cut-in display).

The decorative second symbol of the variable display area 615 may be displayed at the left end of the display screen so that it does not overlap the fanfare background 680 that is slide-in displayed from the right end of the display screen. By setting the display position in this way, it is possible to make the display of the decorative second symbol and the fanfare background 680 of the variable display area 615 easy for the player to visually recognize. Further, when the decorative second symbol of the variable display area 615 is displayed at the right end of the display screen as in the above embodiment, the fanfare background 680 may be slid in from the left end of the display screen. Even in such an aspect, it is possible to prevent the decorative second pattern in the variable display area 615 and the fanfare background 680 from overlapping.

Further, by displaying the fanfare background 680 in a manner as shown in FIG. 70 (R), it is possible to avoid overlapping with the standby hold display (hold display 633) and the special figure changing hold display 643. It should be noted that the fanfare background 680 is displayed on the back side (lower layer) of the fanfare background 680 in a mode (for example, a square frame filled with a single color) that makes it easy to visually recognize the standby pending display and the special figure changing pending display 643. ), the standby hold display and the special figure changing hold display 643 may be made to stand out.

70 (re) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game transition period B is started. When the special transition period B is started, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are hidden. Further, the entire fanfare background 680 is displayed on the display screen, and the decoration first patterns A to C are hidden so that the player can easily see the fanfare background 680. Further, the standby hold display (hold display 633) is hidden.

70 (ro) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C is started. When the fanfare display period C is started, as shown in (b) of FIG. 70, on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680, a "big hit" character that directly informs the player that the big hit is a big hit. 681 is displayed. Unlike the fanfare background 680, the "big hit" character 681 functions as a second notification image that directly notifies that a special game state has occurred, that is, explicitly notifies that the special game state has occurred. In addition, the variable display area 6
15 decoration second design, special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 reserved number display, special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 reserved number display, standby display section 630 standby reserved display (reservation display 633) , The reserved digestion area 640 are hidden. Therefore, the player can easily gaze at the "big hit" character 681 highlighted on the display screen. Further, when the display of the decoration second symbol remains at the timing when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the player may mistakenly recognize the gaming state, but the second decoration symbol is not displayed. The player does not misidentify the game status.

(W) of FIG. 70 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C ends and the big hit round of the special game state (big hit state) is started. When the jackpot round is started, the fanfare background 680 and the "jackpot" character 681 are hidden. Further, on the display screen, a firing position instruction display 691 for instructing a right hit, a round display 676 indicating the current round (“1R”), and a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game at the time of a big hit (
Big hit stop symbol display 677 showing "7"), and game points 678 corresponding to the number of game balls (game value) acquired (given) at the time of big hit are displayed.

[Modified example of the timing chart of the display when it becomes a big hit]
Next, a modification of the display mode of the display screen when the jackpot is won will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a timing chart for explaining changes in the display mode with the passage of time when a big hit occurs on the display screen of the display device 41 of the modified example of the third embodiment. In addition,
In the following description of FIG. 71, descriptions that overlap with FIG. 69 are omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the timing chart of the modified example of the third embodiment, time T2′ is adopted instead of time T2 when the special game transition period B is started. Time T2' is the time when the special game type confirmation period B'for confirming the type of special game state is started. Note that the period including the game result confirmation period A and the special game type confirmation period B′ is step A4.
The display time set in 703 (standby time for decoration special figure change, stop display time), step B
This corresponds to the display time set in 1321 (standby time for variation of decorative special figure, stop display time).

When the special game type confirmation period B'starts at time T2', the display of the number of holdings is hidden along with the decorative first symbols A to C and the waiting and holding display, and the fanfare background 680 is displayed.
Therefore, only the second decorative pattern and the fanfare background 680 are displayed on the display screen, and the player can easily pay attention to the fanfare background 680 together with the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern.

[Modified example of screen transition when it becomes a big hit]
FIG. 72 is a time-series screen transition of the display screen of the display device 41 in which the fanfare background 680 and the “big hit” characters 681 are displayed in different display modes according to the type of big hit in the modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure. In the following description of FIG. 72, the description overlapping with FIG. 70 will be appropriately omitted.

72. (Ru) of FIG. 72 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B′ is started and the super-big hit effect (super-big hit display) is generated from (ri) of FIG. During the special game type confirmation period B′ when the super-big hit effect occurs, as shown in (Ru) of FIG. 72, the fanfare background 68 that suggests the occurrence of the super-big hit effect and the super-big hit (probably strange big hit)
0A is slide-in displayed.

For example, when the number of big hit rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R) or when the special game state ends, a state in which the probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability variation state) Is the effect displayed on. Therefore, when the stop symbols of the decorative first symbol A to C and the decorative second symbol are the probability variation jackpot symbols (for example, "777") that suggest the transition to the probability variation state after the end of the special game state, the super jackpot effect Can be generated. Also, in the case where the stop symbols of the decorative first symbols A to C and the decorative second symbol are normal jackpot symbols (for example, "666") that do not suggest a transition to the probability variation state after the special game state ends,
When the number of big hit rounds is large (for example, in the case of 16R), or when the promotion effect to the probability variation big hit occurs during the special game state, the super jackpot effect can be generated.

72 (re') is the display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680A is slide-in-displayed during the special game type confirmation period B'when the super-big hit effect occurs. The fanfare background 680A that suggests the occurrence of a super-big hit effect is displayed, for example, so that one side thereof has a wavy shape that draws a sine curve.

FIG. 72B shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and the super-big hit effect is generated. When the fanfare display period C starts and the super jackpot effect is generated, the "super jackpot" character 681A is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680A as shown in FIG. Second decoration of area 615
The design ("777") is hidden. Therefore, the player is highlighted on the display screen
It becomes easier to gaze at the "big hit" character 681A. Then, as shown in (W) of FIG. 70, the jackpot round in the special game state is started.

72. (Ru) of FIG. 72 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special game type confirmation period B′ is started and the big hit effect (big hit display) is generated from (Ri) of FIG. During the special game type confirmation period B'when the big hit effect occurs, a fanfare background 680B indicating the big hit effect and the occurrence of the big hit (normal big hit) is slide-in displayed as shown in (ru'') of FIG. To be done.

Big hit production, for example, when the number of big hit rounds is small (for example, in the case of 5R), or when the special game state ends, a special result (for example, big hit) is low in the normal game state (normal state)
This is an effect that is displayed when shifting to. Therefore, in the case where the stop symbols of the ornament first symbol A to C and the ornament second symbol are the normal jackpot symbols (for example, "666") that do not suggest the transition to the probability variation state after the end of the special gaming state, the special gaming state It is possible to generate a jackpot production in which transition to the probability changing state after the end of is not suggested. Further, even when the number of big hit rounds is small (for example, in the case of 5R), a big hit effect can be generated.

72 (re ″) is a display screen of the display device 41 after the fanfare background 680B is slide-in displayed during the special game type confirmation period B′ when the big hit effect is generated. The fanfare background 680B that suggests the occurrence of a big hit effect is displayed, for example, as if one corner thereof was cut diagonally. It should be noted that the fanfare background 680B may be displayed in a form distinguishable from the fanfare background 680A that suggests the occurrence of a super-big hit effect, and may be displayed in a shape, pattern, or color different from the fanfare background 680A or a combination thereof. ..

FIG. 72B shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the fanfare display period C starts and the big hit effect occurs. When the fanfare display period C starts and a big hit effect occurs, the "big hit" character 681B is displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the fanfare background 680B as shown in (ro'') of FIG. 72, and the variable display area is displayed. The second decorative design 615 (“666”) is hidden. Therefore, the player can easily pay attention to the "big hit" character 681B highlighted on the display screen. Then, as shown in (W) of FIG. 70, the jackpot round in the special game state is started.

Thus, the fanfare background 680 (680A, 680B) of the modified example of the third embodiment.
) And "big hit" characters 681 (681A, 681B) indicate the type of big hit that occurs (type)
The display mode is different depending on. For example, the type of big hit is a probability variation big hit/normal big hit or a kind related to the number of rounds. Therefore, the type (type) of the jackpot generated from the type of the fanfare background 680 during the special game type confirmation period B′ is suggested, and the type (type) of the jackpot generated from the type of the “big hit” character 681 during the fanfare display period C (type) ), it is possible to notify the player of the type of big hit before the special game state (big hit state) is started. Therefore, the player can identify the type of big hit from the type of the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 681 together with the stop symbol of the decorative second symbol. In addition, the player can play the fanfare background 680 before the special game state is started.
Since the type of the big hit can be identified from the type of the "big hit" character 681, what kind of effect is expected to be generated for the effect during the big hit (a big hit promotion effect or a mode transition effect that shifts after the big hit ends). Alternatively, it can be prepared in advance.

In the above third embodiment, in addition to the above-described aspect, the decoration first design A to C, the decoration second design, the number of holding displays, the waiting holding display (holding display 633), or the special figure pending display 6
The non-display timing of 43 and the like may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when a pending change effect based on a pre-reading notice (announcement of pending change, etc.) is performed and a big hit occurs, the timing at which the standby pending display (holding display 633) and the special figure changing pending display 643 are hidden (in FIG. 69) (See T1 and T2) may be delayed to hide the second decorative design and the same number as the hold number display (see T3 in FIG. 69).

In this way, by making the standby hold display non-display at the same timing as the decorative second symbol and the number of holds display, it is possible to provide a time for grasping the position of the changed standby hold display and the time when it is consumed. it can. Therefore, even if the changed standby hold display is returned to the normal display mode after the jackpot is over, the player can recognize the standby hold display and expectation for the game corresponding to the standby hold display. Can have

Further, by making the special figure changing pending display 643 changed by the pending change effect non-display at the same timing as the decorative second symbol and the number of pending displays, it is time to grasp what kind of pending display mode is a big hit. Can be provided. Therefore, the next time the same hold display mode is set, the player can have a good impression and expectation in the hold display mode, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the above third embodiment, the fanfare background 680 and the "big hit" character 6
81 may be displayed in a special display mode having a shape, a pattern, a color, or the like different from the normal display mode when the big hit occurs consecutively a predetermined number of times or more. For example, as a special display mode, the shape or pattern of the fanfare background 680 may be changed and displayed. Further, as a special display mode, the color or font of the "big hit" character 681 may be changed (for example, displayed in a large gold color), or characters such as "Congratulations" may be additionally displayed together with the "big hit" character 681. ..

In addition, in the third embodiment described above, when the fanfare background 680 is displayed and when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the sound output mode of the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b) is ( Volume, frequency, etc.) may be changed.

For example, “big hit” rather than speaker volume when the fanfare background 680 is displayed.
By increasing the speaker volume when the character 681 is displayed, it is possible to clearly inform that the jackpot is in the big hit state. In addition, since the speaker volume when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed is large, for example, when the type of big hit and the number of rounds are notified by the sound of the speaker after the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, It becomes easier for the player to hear the notification.

It should be noted that by increasing the speaker volume when the fanfare background 680 is displayed to be larger than the speaker volume when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, the effect before being notified of the big hit state is emphasized. Good.

Further, the change in the output mode of the sound of the speaker is not limited to the sound volume, and the frequency (pitch) of a predetermined sound notified from the gaming machine 10 may be changed. Fanfare background 680
By making the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed higher than the frequency of the sound notified when "is displayed", the player can display the "big hit" character 681 and the number of rounds. It is possible to appeal that the suggestions, etc.

It is noted that the jackpot state is notified by increasing the frequency of the sound notified when the fanfare background 680 is displayed, compared to the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed. You may emphasize the effect before it is done.

Furthermore, the frequency of the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed may be set to a predetermined frequency or lower. In this way, by making the sound to be notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed low-pitched (heavy bass), the woofer provided at a position different from the speaker that is normally used in the gaming machine 10 is provided. Since the sound quality of the sound notified from (the speaker in charge of low-pitched sound reproduction) changes and is heard, it is possible to make the player easily aware of the notified sound. Further, by lowering the sound notified when the "big hit" character 681 is displayed, it is possible to vibrate the speaker, the air around it, the gaming machine 10, and the like. It is possible to appeal that the display of the "big hit" character 681, the suggestion of the number of rounds, and the like start.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, based on the establishment of the start condition, identification information (decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C, large symbol), ornament reduced symbol (decoration second symbol A to C, small) Display means (display device 4) capable of displaying a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the pattern) is variably displayed.
1) and effect control means capable of executing effects related to the variable display game (effect control device 300)
), and. The gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state (big hit state) in which a player is given a game value when the display result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit). The display means (display device 41) displays the first identification information (decoration special symbol (decoration first symbol A to C, large symbol)) as the identification information and a size different from the first identification information. The second identification information (decorative reduced design (decorative second design A to C, small design)) can be displayed. The production control means (production control device 300) suggests the occurrence of a special game state when the first and second identification information items that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed and the display result of the variably displayed game is a special result. The suggestion effect is executed, and while the suggestion effect is being executed, the stopped and displayed first identification information is hidden, while the stop and displayed second identification information is maintained.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the player can be prepared for the occurrence of the special game state by the suggestive effect that suggests the occurrence of the special game state. For example, the player can pull out the ball of the lower plate 23 or exchange a box (so-called dollar box) for storing the acquired game ball with an empty one when the suggestive effect occurs. Further, even after the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the identification information continues to be displayed for a while, so that the player can confirm the result of the special figure variable display game.

The second identification information (decorative reduced design (decorative second design A to C, small design) even during suggestive performance
Since the display of () is maintained, the player can confirm the result of the special figure variation display game from the stop symbol of the second identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the decoration first symbols A to C on the display screen are hidden during execution of the suggestive effect, the player can easily visually recognize the image (fanfare background 680) that suggests the occurrence of the special game state, The interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300), as a suggested effect, a first notification image (fanfare background 680) that implicitly notifies the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state), and the display of the first notification image. After the start, the second notification image (“big hit” character 681) that explicitly notifies the occurrence of the special game state is displayed on the display unit (display device 41). Therefore, the player can confirm the occurrence of the special game state in the second notification image after raising the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state in the first notification image, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, since the suggestion effect can be executed in two stages of the display of the first notification image and the display of the second notification image, it is possible to prolong the time of the suggestion effect and prepare the player for the occurrence of the special game state. ..

The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the second notification image (“big hit” character 681)
It is displayed on the display means (display device 41) in such a manner that the type of special game state (big hit state) can be identified (“super big hit” character 681A, “big hit” character 681B). Therefore, the player is
Before the special game state is started, the type of the big hit can be identified from the type of the second notification image, so what kind of effect is expected to be generated for the effect during the big hit is prepared in advance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments.

[Production control device of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the effect control device 300, which constitutes the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, and the boards and the like connected to the same. As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a power supply device 400, a game control device 100 (game control means, not shown), and a production control device 300 (production control means). Board relay board 915, frame relay board 916, cooling fan 45, LVDS board 918, ROM board 920, etc. are harnesses and connectors (CN).
Take the form connected through.

The production control device 300 is connected to the power supply device 400 and is connected to a DC power supply (32V, 15V, 12V).
V, 5V), power failure monitoring signal (5V), and reset signal (5V) are input. Further, an analysis port 955 or the like can be connected to the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a voltage generation unit 800 (voltage generation means). The voltage generation unit 800 receives 1.05V, 1.5V, DC power (5V) from the power supply device 400,
Generates an output voltage of 3.3V. Details of the voltage generator 800 will be described later.

The board relay board 915 is connected to the board motor driver 44a (a part of the board rendering device 44), the board motor sensor 47a (a performance accessory switch 47), and a board decoration LED driver 46a (a portion of the board decoration device 46). It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals. In addition, the board relay board 9
15 includes a DC power supply (32V, 15V, from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300).
12V, 5V) is supplied.

The frame relay board 916 includes a frame motor driver 44b (a part of the frame effect device), an effect button switch 25a, a frame motor sensor 47b, a first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), a second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b), and a frame. It is a relay board for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the decorative LED driver (a part of the frame decoration device 18). In addition, on the frame relay board 916, the effect control device 30
DC power (12V, 5V) is supplied from the power supply device 400 via 0.

The cooling FAN 45 is a DC power supply (12V) from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300.
) Is supplied to operate.

The LVDS board 918 is a relay board that relays the effect control device 300 and the display device 41. DC power (32 V, 12 V, 5 V) is supplied to the LVDS board 918 from the power supply device 400 via the effect control device 300. In addition, the LVDS board 918 has a voltage generation unit 8
A DC power supply (3.3 V) is supplied from 00, and the DC power supply is output to the display device 41.

A power supply generation circuit 919 can be provided on the LVDS board 918. Power generation circuit 9
Reference numeral 19 converts the DC power (32V) supplied from the power supply device 400 into a DC power (12V) and outputs it to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917). Thereby, the power generation circuit 919 can be designed according to the standard of the display device 41 to be connected, and even when the display device 41 is replaced, it is necessary to modify the production control device 300 by only replacing the LVDS board 918. Therefore, the display device 41 can be easily replaced by that much.

The ROM substrate 920 includes an image ROM 325, and outputs the image information stored in the image ROM 325 to the VDP 312 (video display processor). DC power (3.3 V) is supplied from the voltage generator 800 to the ROM substrate 920.

The effect control device 300 includes a first VDP-RAM 923 (storage unit) and a second VDP-R.
AM924 (storage means) is provided. First VDP-RAM 923 and second VDP-
The RAM 924 is a storage medium that temporarily stores the image information (moving image, still image) decoded by the VDP 312, and operates by being supplied with DC power (1.5 V) from the voltage generation unit 800.

The VDP 312 (general-purpose port 942) included in the effect control device 300 transmits/receives a signal to/from the outside using a 3.3V signal. However, the built-in host CPU that constitutes the VDP 312
(CPU 311, image processing means, VDP core, arithmetic processing means) operates at 1.05V,
The DRAM I/F 940 connected to the first VDP-RAM 923 (storage unit) and the second VDP-RAM 924 (storage unit) operates at 1.5V. Therefore, the VDP 312 operates by being supplied with the DC power supply (1.05V, 1.5V, 3.3V) from the voltage generation unit 800.

As the input side of the VDP 312, in the effect control device 300, the level conversion circuit 9 that performs level conversion (5.0 V→3.3 V) of the signal of the power supply device 400 (power failure monitoring signal, reset signal).
21, level conversion of the signal of the game control device 100 (production command) (5.0V → 3.3V)
Level conversion circuit 922 for performing the level conversion of signals from the board surface motor sensor 47a (5.0
The level conversion circuit 926 that performs V→3.3V), the level conversion circuit 929 that performs the level conversion (5.0V→3.3V) of the signals from the effect button switch 25a and the frame motor sensor 47b.
Is provided.

In addition, as the output side of the VDP 312, the board control board 915 (
Level conversion of signals transmitted to the board motor driver 44a and the board motor sensor 47a (3
． 3V→5.0V) level conversion circuit 925, frame relay board 916 (frame motor driver 44b, effect button switch 25a, frame motor sensor 47b) level conversion of the signal to be transmitted (3.3V→5.0V). Level conversion of the signal transmitted to the display device 41 (LED backlight 917) via the level conversion circuit 928 and the LVDS board 918 (3.3 V→5.
A level conversion circuit 934 for performing 0 V) is provided.

Furthermore, for bidirectional communication of the VDP 312, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE.
Level shift of signals transmitted bidirectionally by the D driver 46a and the I2C communication method (3.3
The level shift circuit 927 for performing V ⇔ 5.0 V and the frame decoration LED driver (decoration device 18
a) and the level shift of the signal transmitted in both directions by the I2C communication method (3.3V⇔5.0V)
A level shift circuit 932 for performing the above) is provided.

Direct-current power supply (15V) from the power supply device 400 is supplied to the effect control device 300, and VD
An amplifier circuit 337 (first amplifier circuit 930) that amplifies the audio data output from P312.
, Second amplifier circuit 931) are provided. The first amplifier circuit 930 outputs the amplified audio data to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a), and the second amplifier circuit 931 outputs the amplified audio data to the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b). To do.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a protection circuit 933 that stabilizes the LVDS signal output from the VDP 312, and the protection circuit 933 provides the display device 41 via the LVDS board 918.
The LVDS signal (3.3V) is output to.

In the effect control device 300, a watchdog timer circuit 324 that monitors the operation of the VDP 312, a PROM 321 that stores programs executed by the VDP 312 and various data are stored.
A FeRAM 323, a volume control switch 335, and the like, which can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure, are provided. The level shift circuit 9 is also provided on the LVDS board 918.
A real-time clock circuit 338 connected to the high voltage (5V) side of 32 is provided.

VDP312, CPU3 which analyzes the production command which is transmitted from game control control equipment 100
11 (built-in host CPU), RAM 322 (built-in CP) that provides a work area for the CPU 311
U work memory), CPU I/F for transmitting/receiving data in the CPU 311 and VDP 312
937, HOSTCPUI/F938, VDP31 that sends data in the PROM 321 to the CPU 311 and outputs various commands (display list, motor command, lamp command, sound command) obtained by the CPU 311 analyzing performance commands.
It has a system control register 939 for performing the initial setting of 2.

The VDP 312 includes a general-purpose port 942 that transmits and receives signals to and from the outside, a CG bus I/F 941 that reads image information from the image ROM 325, a first VDP-RAM 923, and a second VDP-R.
It has a DRAM I/F 940 that transmits and receives image information (moving image, still image) to and from the AM 924.

The VDP 312 has a controller 943 that outputs motor control data based on a motor command and outputs LED control data based on a lamp command. Controller 9
43 generates motor control data based on the motor command, and outputs this to the board surface motor driver 44a, the board surface motor sensor 47a, the frame motor driver 44b, and the frame motor sensor 47b in a mutually distinguishable form.

In addition, the controller 943 decodes the lamp command based on the lamp decoder 944 to generate LED control data, and the LED control data is generated by the board decoration LED driver 46a and the frame decoration LE.
The data is output to the D driver 18a (a part of the frame decoration device 18) in a form in which they can be distinguished from each other.

The VDP 312 has a sound ROM 327 that outputs audio data based on a sound command. The sound ROM 327 selects the sound data stored therein based on the sound command, decodes the sound data based on the sound source LSI 314 (sound decoder), and performs sound quality adjustment by the post-effector 945 and the volume adjustment switch 335. Output to the first frame speaker (upper speaker 19a) and the second frame speaker (lower speaker 19b).

The VDP 312 includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing based on the display list. The image processing circuit uses the image ROM 325 or VRAM based on the display list.
A preloader circuit 946 that reads image information from 326 (storage unit) and the VRAM 326 (or the first VDP-RAM 923 or the second VDP-RAM 924) that reads the image information.
Graphics decoder 947 for decoding to VRAM 326 (or second VDP
A drawing circuit 948 for drawing image information in a frame buffer on the RAM 924), a geometry engine 949 for setting coordinates of the image information, and a VRAM 326 (or the first V
An index table circuit 950 that allocates a storage area in the DP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924, and a display circuit 951 (displays and outputs the frame buffer data and the like stored in the VRAM 326 (or the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924)). Display A, display B, display C) and output selection circuit 95 for frame buffer data and the like.
2, a signal conversion circuit 313 for outputting to the display device 41 by the LVDS method or the like, and a data transfer circuit 953 for transmitting/receiving data in the other image processing circuit.
Data is exchanged with each other through 4.

The VDP 312 has an address bus 935 and a data bus 936. The address bus 935 includes a HOSTCPUI/F 938, a system control register 939, and a DRAM I/F.
940, CG bus I/F 941, general-purpose port 942, controller 943, sound ROM 32
7, addresses are exchanged between the graphics decoder 947, the data transfer circuit 953, the preloader circuit 946, the display circuit 951, and the drawing circuit 948. Data bus 936
Is HOSTCPUI/F938, DRAM I/F940, VRAM326, CG bus I
Data is transmitted and received between the /F 941, the controller 943, the sound ROM 327, the graphics decoder 947, the data transfer circuit 953, the preloader circuit 946, the display circuit 951, and the drawing circuit 948.

In this embodiment, the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924 are the DRA.
It has a common address bus 959a and a data bus 959b connected to the MI/F 940. The first VDP-RAM 923 can access the upper 8 bits of the image information (16 bits) via the data bus 959b, and the second VDP-RAM 924 is the data bus 959b.
The lower 8 bits of the image information can be accessed via the.

Here, in the image information (16 bits), moving image (upper 8 bits) data and still image (lower 8 bits) data are associated with one address. Therefore, the video data is the first VD
The still image data is stored in the P-RAM 923 and is stored in the second VDP-RAM 924.

Accordingly, when the display circuit 951 specifies one address for reading, the first VDP
-Since the moving image data stored in the RAM 923 and the still image data stored in the second VDP-RAM 924 can be read at the same time, the image information (moving image data, still image data) to the display device 41 is displayed. Can improve the transfer speed.

[Voltage generator]
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing a connection form of a plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 constituting the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 74, the voltage generation unit 800 includes a core voltage generation circuit 801 (first voltage generation circuit), a first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (second voltage generation circuit), and a second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (second voltage generation circuit). 3 voltage generation circuit). The core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 have the same configurations as the voltage generation circuit 900 (FIGS. 76 and 77) described later.

The core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the DC power (V _IN =5V) from the power supply device 400, and thereby drives the CPU 311 (VDP core, built-in host CPU) in the VDP 312 with the first output voltage (target voltage: (V1=1.05V) is generated and output to the CPU 311. In addition, the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs a PGD signal (power) that becomes HIGH when the first output voltage maintains a voltage in a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ±10%) centered on the target voltage (V1). A PGD terminal that outputs a good signal) and outputs a PGD signal that becomes LOW when the voltage is out of the predetermined voltage range.

The first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 receives the DC power (V _IN ) from the power supply device 400 to generate a second output voltage (target voltage: V2=1.5 V), which is generated by the DRAMI of the VDP 312. /F940, the first VDP-RAM 923, the second VDP-RAM 924 and the like. However, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 has an EN terminal (enable terminal).
While the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation enable signal, enable signal V _EN ) is being input to the EN terminal from the core voltage generation circuit 801, the second output is generated by generating the reference voltage V _REF described later. When the voltage can be generated and the PGD signal becomes LOW, the generation of the second output voltage is stopped immediately.

The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 receives the DC power (V _IN ) from the power supply device 400 to generate a third output voltage (target voltage: V3=3.3V), which is supplied to the IDP of the VDP 312. /O (general-purpose port 942, etc.), the image ROM 325 of the ROM substrate 920, the display device 41 (
It is output to an LCD panel) or the like. The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 also has an EN terminal, and while the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation permission signal, enable signal V _EN ) is being input from the core voltage generation circuit 801 to the EN terminal, a reference described later is applied. The third output voltage can be generated by generating the voltage V _REF, and the generation of the third output voltage is stopped immediately when the PGD signal becomes LOW.

[Modification of voltage generation unit]
FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a modified example of the connection form of the plurality of voltage generation circuits in the voltage generation unit 800 included in the effect control device 300. In the voltage generation unit 800 shown in FIG. 75, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 maintains the voltage of the second output voltage within a predetermined voltage range (for example, target voltage ±10%) centered on the target voltage (V2). PGD signal (HIGH)
(Second operation permission signal) is output, and when the voltage is out of the predetermined voltage range, the PGD signal (LOW
) Output PGD terminal. The PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 is connected to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the PG of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is connected.
The D terminal is connected to the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. That is, the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are connected in a daisy chain manner with respect to the PGD signal.

Therefore, while the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (HIGH) (first operation enable signal), the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 can generate the second output voltage, and the first peripheral voltage generation The second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 can generate the third output voltage while the circuit 802 is generating the PGD signal (HIGH) (second operation permission signal).

On the other hand, when the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (LOW), the generation of the second output voltage is prohibited in the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, so that the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 outputs the PGD signal (LOW). However, the generation of the third output voltage is prohibited in the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803.

Even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 outputs the PGD signal (HIGH), if the second output voltage of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 becomes lower than the predetermined voltage range, for example, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802. Outputs the PGD signal (LOW), the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
At 03, generation of the third output voltage is prohibited.

In the present embodiment, in the case of FIG. 74, the target value (1.05V) of the first output voltage is the target value (1.5V) of the second output voltage and the target value (3.3V) of the third output voltage. Since it is designed to be lower than ), it is possible to accelerate the rise of the entire effect control device 300 or the entire VDP 312. Further, in the case of FIG. 75, the target value (1.05 V) of the first output voltage is designed to be lower than the target value (1.5 V) of the second output voltage, and the target value of the second output voltage ( 1.5V)
Is designed to be lower than the target value (3.3V) of the third output voltage, the effect control device 30
It is possible to speed up the rise of 0 or VDP 312 as a whole.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a sound ROM 327 and a sound source LS are provided in the VDP 312.
I314 is incorporated. However, when these are separated from the VDP 312, for example, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 may supply DC power to the sound ROM 327 and the sound source LSI 314.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the magnitude of the first output voltage as the output voltage V _OUT is monitored and the first output voltage is outside the predetermined voltage range, the PGD signal output from the core voltage generation circuit 801 causes the first voltage Generation of the second output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
It is configured to determine whether to permit or prohibit the generation of the third output voltage 03. However, the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} maps the relationship between the output voltage _{V OUT,} by monitoring the magnitude of the input voltage _{V IN,} the range of the output voltage the input voltage _{V IN} is to enable the CPU311 When a value to be generated is reached, a LOW signal is output to the EN terminal of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the EN terminal of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 to output the second output of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802. The voltage generation and the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 may be prohibited.

[Voltage generation circuit]
FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a connection form of the voltage generation circuit 900 and its peripheral elements as an example of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803. The voltage generation circuit 900 has a form in which a plurality of external terminals are arranged on one chip. As an external terminal, P to which the input voltage V _IN from the power supply device 400 is input
AV for supplying control power to the VIN terminal and internal circuits (control circuit 901, etc., see FIG. 77)
IN terminal, MODE terminal for setting whether to enable efficiency function at low load, EN terminal for allowing/prohibiting generation of output voltage, SS for setting soft start time described later
Terminal, ITH terminal to which the phase compensation circuit is connected, PGND terminal that serves as the output side ground of the voltage generation circuit 900, AGND terminal that serves as the ground for the internal circuit, _FB terminal that receives the feedback voltage V _FB , voltage generation circuit It has a SW terminal on the output side of 900, a BOOT terminal for voltage adjustment, and a PGD terminal that outputs a power good signal indicating that the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is good.

A smoothing circuit in which an inductor L and a capacitor C0 are connected in series is connected to the SW terminal (switch terminal), and the inductor L is connected to the SW terminal. Further, the contact N1 between the inductor L and the capacitor C0 is connected to the V _OUT terminal which is the output of the voltage generation circuit 900. The capacitor C0 has one end connected to the contact N1 and the other end grounded.

Further, a voltage dividing circuit in which a resistor R1 and a resistor R2 are connected in series is connected to the contact N1, and the resistor R1 is connected to the contact N1. The resistor R2 has one end connected to R1 and the other end grounded. The contact N3 between the resistor R1 and the resistor R2 is connected to the FB terminal (feedback terminal).

One end of the ripple reducing capacitor C1 (and the capacitor C5) is connected to the PVIN terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C1 is grounded.

One end of the ripple reducing capacitor C5 is connected to the AVIN terminal, and the capacitor C5 is connected to the AVIN terminal.
The other end of 5 is grounded. The MODE terminal is connected to the AVIN terminal.

The MODE terminal is provided with a control circuit 901 to be described later when the output of the voltage generation circuit 900 is under a low load.
Is a terminal for setting whether or not to enable the efficiency improving function of 1. The efficiency improving function becomes effective when the applied voltage to the MODE terminal is set to, for example, 0.8 V or more (input voltage V _IN is input). , If the voltage applied to the MODE terminals is set to 0.2 V or less (grounded), the efficiency improving function is disabled and the PWM control described below is executed at a fixed frequency. Further, regardless of the above setting, the PWM control is executed when the load is high.

The EN terminal (enable terminal) is connected to the input voltage V _IN (own AVIN terminal) in the core voltage generation circuit 801, and the core voltage generation circuit 801 in the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802.
, And the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is connected to the PGD terminal of the core voltage generation circuit 801 or the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (see FIGS. 74 and 75).

One end of the capacitor C4 is connected to the SS terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C4 is grounded.

A phase compensation circuit in which a resistor R3 and a capacitor C3 are connected in series is connected to the ITH terminal, and the resistor R3 is connected to the ITH terminal. The capacitor C3 has one end connected to the resistor R3 and the other end grounded.

One end of a resistor R4 (pull-up resistor) is connected to the PGD terminal, and the other end of the resistor R4 is P
It is connected to the VIN terminal (input voltage V _IN ).

One end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the BOOT terminal, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the contact N2 between the SW terminal and the inductor L.

[Internal block diagram of voltage generation circuit]
FIG. 77 is an internal block diagram of the voltage generation circuit 900. The voltage generation circuit 900 includes a control circuit 901, a first transistor Q1, a second transistor Q2, a reference voltage generation circuit 904,
It is composed of a soft start circuit 905, an error amplifier 907, an oscillation circuit 908, a PWM comparator 909, and the like.

Although both the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are NMOS transistors (N-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistors), the first transistor Q1 may be PMOS transistors (P-channel metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistors). ..

The drain terminal of the first transistor Q1 is connected to the PVIN terminal, the source terminal is connected to the SW terminal and the drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 via the contact N4, and the gate terminal is connected to the first buffer 902.

The drain terminal of the second transistor Q2 is connected to the source terminal and the SW terminal of the first transistor Q1 via the contact N4, the source terminal is connected to the PGND terminal, and the gate terminal is connected to the second buffer 903.

The voltage generation circuit 900 is provided with a bootstrap circuit in which the diode Db and the capacitor C2 are connected in series. In the voltage generation circuit 900, the anode of the diode Db is connected to the PVIN terminal, the cathode of the diode Db is connected to one of the capacitors C2 via the BOOT terminal, and the other of the capacitors C2 is connected to the SW terminal as described above. Has been done. Therefore, a voltage obtained by combining the voltage drop in the diode Db and the applied voltage to the capacitor C2 is always applied between the drain terminal and the source terminal of the first transistor Q1, and the first buffer 902 has the same voltage applied to the capacitor C2. A voltage is applied. Therefore, even if an NMOS transistor is applied as the first transistor Q1,
The bootstrap circuit can reliably turn on the first transistor Q1.

The control circuit 901 uses a pulse width modulation (PWM) having a fixed frequency.
Modulation) control or pulse control based on an efficiency improving function so that the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are alternately turned on and off.
1 ON signal S1 (HIGH, LOW) and 2nd transistor Q2 ON signal S2 (LOW)
, HIGH) is output. However, the on/off states of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 are controlled to be reversed so that the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 do not turn on at the same time and a through current does not occur. At this time, one may be turned off and the other may be turned on after the dead time has elapsed.

Here, the efficiency improving function means that the output voltage V _{O is} controlled by performing on/off control of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2 when the output voltage V _OUT has dropped to a predetermined threshold voltage.
_{When the UT} is recovered and the output voltage V _OUT is kept higher than the predetermined threshold voltage, the output of the control circuit 901 is omitted by thinning out the clock signal V _CLK from the oscillation circuit 908 ( As a result, the function of improving the efficiency of the voltage generation circuit 900 (reducing power consumption) by thinning the on/off of the first transistor Q1 and the second transistor Q2).

Therefore, the pulse control based on the efficiency improving function is effective control when the load connected to the output voltage V _OUT is a low load, that is, when the speed of the voltage drop of the output voltage V _OUT is low.

In the voltage generation circuit 900, either the normal PWM modulation control or the pulse control can be selected. For example, when the input voltage V _IN is input to the MODE terminal, the pulse control can be selected, and when the MODE terminal is grounded, the PWM modulation control can be selected. However, when the load connected to the output voltage V _OUT is a high load, the output voltage V _O
The voltage drop speed of the _UT is increased, the frequency of thinning out the clock signal V _CLK is decreased, and the state is substantially the same as the PWM modulation control. Therefore, when the load is high, the voltage generation circuit 900
Generates the output voltage V _OUT by PWM modulation control even if the pulse control is selected.

The reference voltage generation circuit 904 is connected to the EN terminal and generates the reference voltage V _REF when the enable signal V _EN (PGD signal (HIGH) or input voltage V _IN ) is input.
When the enable signal V _EN is cut off (when the PGD signal (LOW) is input), the generation of the reference voltage V _REF is stopped.

In the steady state, the output voltage V _OUT and the reference voltage V _REF (=V _FB ) are V _OUT =
There is a relationship of ((R1+R2)/R2)·V _REF . Therefore, the target voltage of the first output voltage (
V1=1.05V), the target voltage of the second output voltage (V2=1.5V), the target voltage of the third output voltage (V3=3.3V), the resistance R1, the resistance R2, and the reference voltage V _REF are adjusted. It can be set by doing.

The soft start circuit 905 supplies electric charges to the capacitor C4 when the reference voltage generation circuit 904 generates the reference voltage V _REF, and outputs the voltage applied to the capacitor C4 as the soft start voltage V _SS, for example. The soft start voltage V _SS becomes a value larger than V _REF after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 ms) after the soft start circuit 905 starts to supply the charge to the capacitor C4.

The power good circuit has a determination circuit 906 and a third transistor Q3. The determination circuit 906 is connected to the FB terminal and the gate terminal of the third transistor Q3. The drain terminal of the third transistor Q3 is connected to the PGD terminal, and the source terminal is grounded.

The determination circuit 906 drives when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal, outputs an ON signal (HIGH) to the third transistor Q3, and turns on the third transistor Q3. At this time, since the current from the resistor R4 connected to the input voltage V _IN flows through the third transistor Q3 (see FIG. 76), the output of the PGD terminal connected to the drain side of the third transistor Q3 becomes LOW. Become. On the other hand, the determination circuit 906 makes the third transistor Q3 non-conductive by stopping the ON signal when the feedback voltage V _FB is within the predetermined voltage range, and sets the output of the PGD terminal to HIGH.

Note that in the determination circuit 906, the above-described predetermined voltage range may have a hysteresis characteristic, and a predetermined voltage range (for example, V _FB) for maintaining the output of the PGD terminal at HIGH, that is, for maintaining the output of the ON signal. =V _REF ±10% or less) and a predetermined voltage range (for example, V _FB =V _REF ±7% or less) when the output of the PGD terminal is changed from LOW to HIGH, that is, when the ON signal is returned, are different from each other. There is.

In the error amplifier 907, the first non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output side of the reference voltage generating circuit 904, the second non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output side of the soft start circuit 905, and the inverting input terminal is connected to the FB terminal. The output terminal is connected to the inverting input terminal of the PWM comparator 909. A phase compensation circuit (resistor R3, capacitor C3) is connected to the output terminal to stabilize the operation of the entire voltage generation circuit 900.

The error amplifier 907 generates an error signal V _ERR based on the difference between the feedback voltage V _FB and the smaller one of the reference voltage V _REF and the soft start voltage V _SS , and outputs this to the PWM comparator 909. ..

As the oscillation circuit 908, for example, a ring oscillator in which a plurality of inverters or differential amplifiers are connected in a ring shape, a CR oscillation circuit, an LC oscillation circuit, or the like can be applied. The oscillator circuit 908 is
For example, it starts when a predetermined voltage is applied to the AVIN terminal, and generates the clock signal V _CLK based on V _REF and V _SS .

The slope signal V _SLOPE is, for example, an ON signal (HIGH signal) in the clock signal V _CLK.
Signal) is integrated in the time direction to form a waveform that repeats a slope that rises with time due to the oscillation frequency. The oscillator circuit 908 outputs the clock signal V _CLK to the set terminal S of the flip-flop circuit 910 and outputs the slope signal V _SLOPE to PWM.
Output to the non-inverting input terminal of the comparator 909.

The inverting input terminal of the PWM comparator 909 is connected to the output terminal of the error amplifier 907, and the non-inverting input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the slope signal V _SLOPE of the oscillation circuit 908. The PWM comparator 909 _controls the slope signal V _SLOPE and the error signal V _ERR.
The PWM signal V _PRM is generated based on the magnitude relationship with
It outputs to the reset terminal R of 0. At this time, for example, when V _ERR ≧V _SLOPE , P
The WM signal V _PWM can be HIGH (high voltage), and when V _ERR <V _SLOPE , the PWM signal V _PWM can be LOW (low voltage).

The flip-flop circuit 910 generates and outputs the control signal V _Q having the duty ratio required by the control circuit 901. The set terminal S of the flip-flop circuit 910 receives the clock signal V _CLK of the oscillator circuit 908, the reset terminal R receives the PWM signal V _PWM from the PWM comparator 909, and the output terminal Q thereof receives the control signal V _Q. It is output, and this is input to the control circuit 901. The control signal V _Q is, for example, for generating the ON signal S1 of the first transistor Q1, and the clock signal V _CLK changes from LOW to H.
It changes from LOW to HIGH at the timing when it becomes IGH, and changes from HIGH to LOW at the timing when the PWM signal V _PWM changes from LOW to HIGH. In the control circuit 901, the ON signal S2 of the second transistor Q2 is the control signal V _Q and the clock signal V _CLK.
Based on the above, the control signal _VQ is generated to be LOW when it is HIGH and to be HIGH when the control signal _VQ is LOW.

The undervoltage protection circuit 911 monitors the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal to monitor an undervoltage abnormality.

The short circuit protection circuit 912 operates by using the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source,
The feedback voltage V _FB is monitored to detect a short circuit abnormality.

The temperature protection circuit 913 operates, for example, using the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power source,
The temperature of the voltage generation circuit 900 is monitored to detect a temperature abnormality.

The overvoltage protection circuit 914 operates, for example, using the voltage supplied to the AVIN terminal as a power supply, and monitors the feedback voltage V _FB to detect an overvoltage abnormality.

The operation of the voltage generation circuit 900 will be described. First, for example, when the ON signal S2 is LOW and the ON signal S1 of the first transistor Q1 rises from LOW to HIGH, the first transistor Q1 is turned on (conducts), and The second transistor Q2 of the two-transistor Q2 is turned off (
Since it is non-conducting, the switch voltage V _SW which is the voltage of the SW terminal becomes HIGH. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE starts rising from the initial value with a predetermined slope.

After that, when the slope voltage V _SLOPE becomes higher than the error signal V _ERR , the ON signal S1 becomes LOW and the ON signal S2 becomes HIGH, whereby the switch voltage V _SW
Becomes LOW. At this time, the slope voltage V _SLOPE voltage is reset to the initial value.

By the way, the crossing timing of the error signal V _ERR and the slope voltage V _SLOPE is delayed as the error signal V _ERR is higher. Therefore, the ON period of the first transistor Q1 becomes long, and the duty ratio of the ON period becomes large. Conversely, the lower the error signal V _{ERR, the} earlier the crossing timing with the slope voltage V _SLOPE . Therefore, the first transistor Q1
The ON period of is shortened and the duty ratio of the ON period is reduced.

As described above, the switch voltage V _SW repeats HIGH and LOW, but the inductor L
Also, the output voltage V _OUT whose voltage fluctuation is suppressed within a predetermined range is generated through the smoothing circuit including the capacitor C0. Then, the desired output voltage V _OUT is generated from the input voltage V _IN by determining the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 according to the error signal V _ERR .

The soft start voltage V _SS is the same as the enable signal V _EN (or PGD signal (HIG
H), input voltage V _IN ) After inputting, it gradually rises from 0 V, and finally _{reaches the} reference voltage V _REF.
To a higher voltage value. Further, the error amplifier 907 generates the error signal V _ERR according to the difference between the lower one of the reference voltage V _REF and the soft start voltage V _SS and the feedback voltage V _FB . Therefore, while the soft start voltage V _SS is lower than the reference voltage V _REF , the error signal V _ERR is generated according to the difference between the feedback voltage V _FB and the soft start voltage V _SS .

The error signal V _ERR thus generated gradually rises from around 0 V as the soft start voltage V _SS rises. Therefore, the duty ratio of the first transistor Q1 also gradually increases from the minimum value, so that it is possible to prevent the inrush current to the load connected to the capacitors C0 and V _OUT .

[Time chart 1 at power-on and power-off]
78 shows a core voltage generation circuit 801 and a first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8 according to the connection configuration of FIG.
02 is a time chart when the output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is turned on and off. The core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, the second
Changes in the output voltage of the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described.

At time t0, when the input voltage V _IN is input from the power supply device 400, the core voltage generation circuit 801 generates the first output voltage based on the soft start voltage V _SS output from the soft start circuit 905 and raises it. Let Meanwhile, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second
In the peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, the input voltage V _IN is input, but the PGD signal input to the EN terminal is in the LOW state, and the generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 0.7% lower than the target voltage (V1=1.05V).
When reaching 977 V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the PGD signal (HIGH signal) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
03 simultaneously starts to generate the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, and increases at a predetermined speed (even different speeds) based on the soft start voltage V _SS . Then, the first output voltage converges to the target voltage (V1=1.05V) and the second output voltage converges to the target voltage (V2=
1.5V), the third output voltage converges to the target voltage (V3=3.3V), and enters a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts decreasing at time t3 and becomes less than 0.945V which is 10% lower than V1 at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 changes the PDG signal to H level.
Switch from IGH to LOW. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 are prohibited from generating the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, and the second output voltage and the third output voltage immediately decrease. It becomes 0V. At this time, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 8
02 of the soft-start voltage _{V SS,} and a soft-start voltage _{V SS} of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 becomes 0V. The drop rates of the second output voltage and the third output voltage depend on the magnitudes of the capacitor components of the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803, respectively.

After that, when the first output voltage recovers to 0.977V or more, which is 7% lower than V1, the core voltage generation circuit 801 switches the PDG signal from LOW to HIGH again, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 802. The generation circuit 803 outputs the second output voltage and the third output voltage, respectively, as described above.
An output voltage can be generated.

Here, in the core voltage generation circuit 801 (voltage generation circuit 900), the first output voltage is outside the range of the first predetermined voltage range ΔVa1 (V1±7%: 0.9765V≦ΔVa1≦1.1235V). The PGD signal (HIGH) is output when the voltage becomes a voltage within the range. In addition, the first output voltage is in the first predetermined voltage range ΔVb1 (V1±10%: 0.945).
When the voltage within the range of V≦ΔVb1≦1.155V becomes a voltage outside the range, the PGD signal (LOW) is output. Therefore, the PGD signal (LOW) is output even when the first output voltage exceeds 1.155V, and the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 respectively output the second output voltage and the third output voltage. Generation of output voltage is prohibited.

Similarly, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 (voltage generation circuit 900) outputs the second output voltage at the second
A PGD signal (HIGH) may be output when a voltage outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa2 (V2±7%: 1.395V≦ΔVa2≦1.605V) falls within the range. it can. Further, the second output voltage is in the second predetermined voltage range ΔVb2 (V2±10%
A PGD signal (LOW) can be output when the voltage within the range of: 1.35V≦ΔVb2≦1.65V becomes a voltage outside the range.

Similarly, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 (voltage generation circuit 900) outputs the third output voltage at the third level.
A PGD signal (HIGH) may be output when a voltage outside the predetermined voltage range ΔVa3 (V3±7%: 3.069V≦ΔVa3≦3.531V) falls within the range. it can. Further, the third output voltage is the third predetermined voltage range ΔVb3 (V3±10%
: 2.97V≦ΔVb3≦3.63V), the PGD signal (LOW) can be output when the voltage becomes a voltage outside the range.

[Time chart 2 at power-on and power-off]
FIG. 79 is a time chart of the output voltage of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 according to the connection form of the string of FIG. is there. In FIG. 79, the time indicating how the output voltages of the core voltage generation circuit 801, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802, and the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 increase sequentially when the power is turned on and when the output voltages decrease in order when the power is turned off. It is a chart.

Similarly to the above, at time t0, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the input voltage V _IN from the power supply device 400 and outputs the soft start voltage V output from the soft start circuit 905.
The first output voltage is generated based on _SS and is raised, but the generation of the second output voltage and the third output voltage is still prohibited.

At time t1, the first output voltage is 0.7% lower than the target voltage (V1=1.05V).
When reaching 977 V, the core voltage generation circuit 801 receives the PGD signal (HIGH signal) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 starts generating the second output voltage and increases at a predetermined speed based on the soft start voltage V _SS . Further, the first output voltage converges on the target voltage (V1=1.05V).

At time t2, the second output voltage is 7% lower than the target voltage (V2=1.5V) 1.3.
When the voltage reaches 5V, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 receives the PGD signal (HIGH signal) from the PGD terminal.
H) is output. Thus, the second peripheral voltage generating circuit 803 starts to generate a third output voltage, it rises at a predetermined speed on the basis of the soft-start voltage V _SS. Then, the second output voltage converges to the target voltage (V2=1.5V), and then the third output voltage also converges to the target voltage (V3=
It converges to 3.3V) and becomes a steady state.

When the first output voltage starts decreasing at time t3 and becomes less than 0.945V which is 10% lower than V1 at time t4, the core voltage generation circuit 801 changes the PDG signal to H level.
Switch from IGH to LOW. As a result, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 is prohibited from generating the second output voltage, and the second output voltage immediately drops to 0V.

When the second output voltage starts decreasing at time t4 and becomes less than 1.35V which is 10% lower than V2 at time t5, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802 switches the PDG signal from HIGH to LOW. .. As a result, the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 is prohibited from generating the third output voltage, and the third output voltage immediately drops to 0V.

Even if the core voltage generation circuit 801 is operating normally, the first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802
It is also possible to prevent malfunction of peripheral circuits such as the display device 41 by stopping the generation of the third output voltage of the second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803 when the second output voltage of the second peripheral voltage decreases.

[Enclosure of production control device and LVDS board]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the outer shapes of the effect control device 300 and the LVDS board 918. Figure 8
As shown in 0, the effect control device 300 and the LVDS board 918 are arranged in separate housings. For example, one corner of a housing 956 that houses the effect control device 300 is cut out into a rectangular parallelepiped, and the LVDS board 918 is housed in a rectangular parallelepiped housing 957 that is slightly smaller in the width direction and the depth direction than the rectangular parallelepiped. have. Although not shown, the housing 95
6, the housing 957 is connected by a harness and a connector. In this way, since the effect control device 300 is separated from the LVDS board 918, the housing 956 that houses the effect control device 300 is designed with a strong one to prevent unauthorized modification of the effect control device 300. can do.

Further, since there is a gap 958 between the housing 956 and the housing 957, the LVDS board 918 (
The heat generated by the power generation circuit 919) can be reduced from being transmitted to the effect control device 300. Further, it is preferable that a large number of slits are formed on the surface of the housing 957 which houses the LVDS substrate 918 to form an uneven shape to form a heat sink. In FIG. 79, the vertically long fins 960 are formed on the side surfaces of the housing 957 and the circular heat dissipation holes 961 are formed on the upper surface of the housing 957, but they may be attached in reverse. As described above, by increasing the surface area of the housing 957 (the LVDS substrate 918), the heat radiation amount can be improved, and the deterioration of the LVDS substrate 918 due to heat can be prevented.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
According to the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41 a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed, and an effect related to the variable display game. The possible production control means (production control device 300) is provided. The effect control unit (effect control device 300) is a storage unit (for example, a first VDP-RAM) that stores image information.
923, a storage circuit such as the second VDP-RAM 924) and game control means (game control device 1)
Image processing means (CPU 311, image processing circuit) for processing image information based on a command from (00), voltage generation means (voltage generation section 800) capable of generating a voltage to be supplied to the storage means and the image processing means, Equipped with. The voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 800) generates the first output voltage (target voltage: V1=1.05V) to be applied to the image processing unit, and the first output voltage is the first voltage.
A first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) that outputs a first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when within a predetermined voltage range (ΔVa1), and a storage unit when the first operation permission signal is input (For example, a second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) that generates a second output voltage (target voltage: V2=1.5 V) applied to the first VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924. The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) includes the first voltage generation circuit
When the output voltage is out of the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1), the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (H
IGH)) to stop the output of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802).
) Stop generating the second output voltage.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU 3) that constitutes the effect control means (effect control device 300).
The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops). Of the storage means (for example, the first VDP-RAM 923, the second VDP
A malfunction of the DP-RAM 924) can be prevented. For example, for image processing means (CP
The power supply to the first voltage generation circuit (for the U311) (core voltage generation circuit 801) is stopped (
Alternatively, as a result of the voltage drop, the first voltage generation circuit causes the image processing unit (CPU 311) to
) Is stopped (or a voltage drop), the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped from being generated.
It is possible to prevent malfunction of the VDP-RAM 923 and the second VDP-RAM 924).

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the target value (1.05V) of the first output voltage is lower than the target value of the second output voltage (1.5V). As a result, it is possible to speed up the start-up of the entire effect control unit (effect control device 300) including the storage unit and the image processing unit.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has peripheral circuits (for example, general-purpose port 942, RO) connected to the image processing means (CPU 311 and image processing circuit).
The M substrate 920 and the display device 41) are provided, and the voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 800) applies the third output voltage (target voltage: V3=3.3V) to the peripheral circuit when the first operation permission signal is input. )
And a third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) that generates The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops the output of the first operation permission signal (PDG signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage is outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1), The generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) and the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) are stopped.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU 3) that constitutes the effect control means (effect control device 300).
The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops). Is stopped and the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped to prevent malfunction of the storage unit and the peripheral circuit.

According to the fourth embodiment, the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802)
When the second output voltage falls within the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVa2), the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) is output, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the image processing means (CP).
U311 and an image processing circuit) are provided with peripheral circuits (for example, general-purpose port 942, ROM substrate 920, and display device 41), and the voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 800) receives the second operation permission signal. A third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) that generates a third output voltage (target voltage: V3=3.3V) applied to the peripheral circuit is provided. The first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) stops the output of the first operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) when the first output voltage is outside the first predetermined voltage range (ΔVb1), The generation of the second output voltage by the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) is stopped, and the second operation enable signal (PGD signal (HIGH)) of the second output voltage is stopped when the generation of the second output voltage is stopped. By stopping the output, the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped. The second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) outputs the second operation permission signal (PGD signal (HIGH) when the second output voltage is out of the second predetermined voltage range (ΔVb2).
)) is stopped, the generation of the third output voltage by the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped.

Thereby, the image processing means (CPU 3) that constitutes the effect control means (effect control device 300).
The second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) when the voltage supply from the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) to 11) is stopped (or the voltage drops). Is stopped and the generation of the third output voltage of the third voltage generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803) is stopped to prevent malfunction of the storage unit and the peripheral circuit. In addition, even if the first voltage generation circuit (core voltage generation circuit 801) is operating normally, the third voltage is generated when the second output voltage of the second voltage generation circuit (first peripheral voltage generation circuit 802) decreases. By stopping the generation of the third output voltage of the generation circuit (second peripheral voltage generation circuit 803), malfunction of the peripheral circuit can be prevented.

Further, in the above configuration, the storage means for storing the image information is replaced with a storage means for storing the voice information (sound ROM 327 or the like), and the image processing means for processing the image information is replaced by the voice processing means for processing the voice information ( The fourth embodiment can be applied even if replaced with the CPU 311).

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 25 Production Button 25b Touch Panel 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 36 First Starting Winning Port (First Starting Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 41 display device 42 third start winning opening 44 board production device 46 board decoration device 50 batch display device (LED)
100 game control device (main board)
300 Production control device (sub board)
311 CPU
610 Variable display area 615 Variable display area 630 Reserved display section 633 Reserved display 640 Reserved digestion area 650 Special figure 1 Reserved number display section 660 Special figure 2 Reserved number display section 680 Fanfare background 681 Big hit character (big hit display)
800 voltage generation unit 801 core voltage generation circuit (first voltage generation circuit)
802 First peripheral voltage generation circuit (second voltage generation circuit)
803 Second peripheral voltage generation circuit (third voltage generation circuit)
923 First VDP-RAM
924 Second VDP-RAM

Claims (2)

A game including display means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed in a plurality of columns based on establishment of a start condition, and effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game. In the machine,
The effect control means,
It is possible to stop the predetermined identification information that is being variably displayed,
Oite a predetermined period prior to a temporary stop state different from said stop state is displayed on the same level and the predetermined identification information in the variable display identification to be displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information By displaying the information with high transparency, it is more difficult to see or invisible than the predetermined identification information .
The predetermined period is shorter than a period from the time when the predetermined identification information is displayed in the display area of the display unit to the time when the predetermined identification information is in the temporary stop state, and is moved to the temporary stop position. A gaming machine characterized by that. A game including display means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed in a plurality of columns based on establishment of a start condition, and effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game. In the machine,
The effect control means,
It is possible to stop the predetermined identification information that is being variably displayed,
Oite a predetermined period prior to a temporary stop state different from said stop state is displayed on the same level and the predetermined identification information in the variable display identification to be displayed before or after the variable display direction with respect to the predetermined identification information The information is made invisible based on the display control for the identification information ,
The predetermined period is shorter than a period from the time when the predetermined identification information is displayed in the display area of the display unit to the time when the predetermined identification information is in the temporary stop state, and is moved to the temporary stop position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images